summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/doc
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorrillig <rillig>2006-06-01 09:36:55 +0000
committerrillig <rillig>2006-06-01 09:36:55 +0000
commit10648e986d874f9fcc20e521156261bec6318919 (patch)
tree8a05fcaf4b8c71fbe1d3783c57e9a815ead653a4 /doc
parentffcf81f97e0992de6d52e5868379ec5feeb36932 (diff)
downloadpkgsrc-10648e986d874f9fcc20e521156261bec6318919.tar.gz
regen.
Diffstat (limited to 'doc')
-rw-r--r--doc/pkgsrc.html1393
-rw-r--r--doc/pkgsrc.txt1385
2 files changed, 1439 insertions, 1339 deletions
diff --git a/doc/pkgsrc.html b/doc/pkgsrc.html
index b66c8fc8b8c..8a3f0db762d 100644
--- a/doc/pkgsrc.html
+++ b/doc/pkgsrc.html
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@
</h3>
</div></div>
<div><p class="copyright">Copyright © 1994-2006 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc</p></div>
-<div><p class="pubdate">$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.18 2006/05/19 22:05:09 rillig Exp $</p></div>
+<div><p class="pubdate">$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.19 2006/06/01 08:39:03 rillig Exp $</p></div>
<div><div class="abstract">
<p class="title"><b>Abstract</b></p>
<p>pkgsrc is a centralized package management system for
@@ -152,203 +152,203 @@
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="part"><a href="#developers-guide">II. The pkgsrc developer's guide</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#components">8. Package components - files, directories and contents</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#creating">8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#components">9. Package components - files, directories and contents</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">8.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">8.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">8.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">8.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">8.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">8.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">8.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">9.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">9.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">9.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">9.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">9.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">9.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makefile">9. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makefile">10. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">9.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">9.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">10.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">10.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">10.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">9.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">9.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">10.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">10.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#plist">10. PLIST issues</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#plist">11. PLIST issues</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">10.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">10.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">10.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">10.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">10.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">10.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">11.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">11.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">11.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">11.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">11.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">11.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#buildlink">11. Buildlink methodology</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#buildlink">12. Buildlink methodology</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">11.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">12.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">11.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">12.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">11.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">12.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">11.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">12.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pkginstall">12. The pkginstall framework</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pkginstall">13. The pkginstall framework</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">12.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">12.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">13.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">13.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">12.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">13.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">12.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">12.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">13.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">13.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">12.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">12.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">12.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">12.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">12.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">13.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">13.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">13.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">13.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">13.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#options">13. Options handling</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#options">14. Options handling</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">13.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">13.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">13.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">14.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">14.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">14.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#build">14. The build process</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#build">15. The build process</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">14.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">14.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">14.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">14.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">14.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">14.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">14.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">14.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">14.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">14.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">14.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">14.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">14.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">14.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">14.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">14.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">15.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">15.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">15.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">15.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">15.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">15.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">15.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">15.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">15.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">15.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">15.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">15.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">15.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">15.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">15.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">15.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tools">15. Tools needed for building or running</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tools">16. Tools needed for building or running</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">15.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">15.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">16.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">16.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#fixes">16. Making your package work</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#fixes">17. Making your package work</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">16.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">17.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">16.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">16.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">16.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">16.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">17.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">17.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">17.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">17.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#downloading-issues">16.2. Possible downloading issues</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.fetch">17.2. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#configuration-gotchas">16.3. Configuration gotchas</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.configure">17.3. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes-build">16.4. Building the package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.build">17.4. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.build.cpp">17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">17.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-defines">16.4.1. CPP defines</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list-examples">16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list">16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">17.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">17.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">16.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.install">17.6. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">16.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">16.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">16.5.3. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">16.5.7. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">16.5.8. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">16.5.15. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">17.6.1. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">17.6.5. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">17.6.6. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">17.6.13. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">16.6. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">17.7. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#debug">17. Debugging</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#submit">18. Submitting and Committing</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#debug">18. Debugging</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#submit">19. Submitting and Committing</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">18.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">18.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">19.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">19.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#devfaq">19. Frequently Asked Questions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#devfaq">20. Frequently Asked Questions</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="part"><a href="#infrastructure">III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#infr.design">20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#infr.design">21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">20.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">21.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">20.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">20.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">21.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">21.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">20.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">21.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#regression">21. Regression tests</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#regression">22. Regression tests</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">21.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">21.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">21.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">22.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">22.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">22.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">21.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">21.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">22.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">22.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#porting">22. Porting pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#porting">23. Porting pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">22.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">23.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
<dt><span class="appendix"><a href="#examples">A. A simple example package: bison</a></span></dt>
@@ -770,10 +770,13 @@ source packages</a></span></dt>
<a name="uptodate-tar"></a>2.2.1. Via tar files</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="warning" style="margin-left: 0.5in; margin-right: 0.5in;">
<h3 class="title">Warning</h3>
-<p>Updating from tar file cannot detect or preserve
- any changes you have done to your local copy of pkgsrc.
- Therefore updating via CVS is strongly
- recommended.</p>
+<p>When updating from a tar file, you first need to
+ completely remove the old pkgsrc directory. Otherwise those
+ files that have been removed from pkgsrc in the mean time will
+ not be removed on your local disk, resulting in inconsistencies.
+ When removing the old files, any changes that you have done to
+ the pkgsrc files will be lost after updating. Therefore updating
+ via CVS is strongly recommended.</p>
</div>
<p>To update pkgsrc from a tar file, download the tar file as
explained above. Then, make sure that you have not made any
@@ -786,11 +789,7 @@ source packages</a></span></dt>
<p>To update pkgsrc via CVS, make sure the environment
variable <code class="varname">CVS_RSH</code> is set as above. Then,
change to the pkgsrc directory and run <span><strong class="command">cvs -q update
- -dP</strong></span>. The &#8220;<span class="quote">-q</span>&#8221; option tells cvs to only
- report those files that have changed. The &#8220;<span class="quote">-d</span>&#8221;
- option fetches new packages (which is curiously not done by
- default), and the &#8220;<span class="quote">-P</span>&#8221; option removes empty
- directories after everything has been updated.</p>
+ -dP</strong></span>.</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
<a name="uptodate-cvs-switch"></a>2.2.2.1. Switching between different pkgsrc branches</h4></div></div></div>
@@ -1817,7 +1816,7 @@ source packages</a></span></dt>
pkgsrc tree instances.)</p></li>
<li><p><code class="varname">LOCALPATCHES</code>:
Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc.
- See <a href="#components.patches" title="8.3. patches/*">Section 8.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> for more
+ See <a href="#components.patches" title="9.3. patches/*">Section 9.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> for more
information. <em class="replaceable"><code>rel</code></em> and
<em class="replaceable"><code>arch</code></em> are replaced with OS
release (&#8220;<span class="quote">2.0</span>&#8221;, etc.) and architecture
@@ -1992,13 +1991,13 @@ PKG_OPTIONS.apache= suexec </pre>
gzipped tar file. See <a href="#logs.package" title="B.2. Packaging figlet">Section B.2, &#8220;Packaging figlet&#8221;</a> for a
continuation of the above <a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc/misc/figlet/README.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">misc/figlet</code></a> example.</p>
<p>
- See <a href="#submit" title="Chapter 18. Submitting and Committing">Chapter 18, <i>Submitting and Committing</i></a> for information on how to submit
+ See <a href="#submit" title="Chapter 19. Submitting and Committing">Chapter 19, <i>Submitting and Committing</i></a> for information on how to submit
such a binary package.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
<a name="settings-for-creationg-of-binary-packages"></a>6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages</h2></div></div></div>
-<p>See <a href="#build.helpful-targets" title="14.16. Other helpful targets">Section 14.16, &#8220;Other helpful targets&#8221;</a>.</p>
+<p>See <a href="#build.helpful-targets" title="15.16. Other helpful targets">Section 15.16, &#8220;Other helpful targets&#8221;</a>.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
@@ -2907,191 +2906,282 @@ a security check before building any package. See
<div class="part" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h1 class="title">
<a name="developers-guide"></a>Part II. The pkgsrc developer's guide</h1></div></div></div>
+<div class="partintro" lang="en">
+<div></div>
+<p>This part of the book deals with creating and
+ modifying packages. It starts with a &#8220;<span class="quote">HOWTO</span>&#8221;-like
+ guide on creating a new package. The remaining chapters are more
+ like a reference manual for pkgsrc.</p>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#components">8. Package components - files, directories and contents</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#creating">8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#components">9. Package components - files, directories and contents</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">8.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">8.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">8.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">8.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">8.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">8.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">8.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">9.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">9.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">9.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">9.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">9.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">9.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makefile">9. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#makefile">10. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">9.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">9.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">10.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">10.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">10.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">9.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">9.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">10.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">10.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#plist">10. PLIST issues</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#plist">11. PLIST issues</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">10.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">10.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">10.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">10.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">10.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">10.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">11.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">11.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">11.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">11.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">11.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">11.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#buildlink">11. Buildlink methodology</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#buildlink">12. Buildlink methodology</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">11.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">12.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">11.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">12.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">11.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">12.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">11.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">12.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pkginstall">12. The pkginstall framework</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#pkginstall">13. The pkginstall framework</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">12.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">12.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">13.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">13.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">12.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">13.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">12.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">12.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">13.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">13.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">12.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">12.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">12.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">12.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">12.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">13.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">13.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">13.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">13.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">13.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#options">13. Options handling</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#options">14. Options handling</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">13.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">13.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">13.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">14.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">14.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">14.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#build">14. The build process</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#build">15. The build process</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">14.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">14.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">14.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">14.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">14.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">14.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">14.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">14.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">14.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">14.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">14.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">14.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">14.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">14.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">14.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">14.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">15.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">15.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">15.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">15.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">15.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">15.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">15.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">15.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">15.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">15.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">15.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">15.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">15.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">15.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">15.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">15.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tools">15. Tools needed for building or running</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#tools">16. Tools needed for building or running</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">15.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">15.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">16.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">16.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#fixes">16. Making your package work</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#fixes">17. Making your package work</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">16.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">17.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">16.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">16.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">16.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">16.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">17.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">17.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">17.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">17.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#downloading-issues">16.2. Possible downloading issues</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.fetch">17.2. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#configuration-gotchas">16.3. Configuration gotchas</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.configure">17.3. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes-build">16.4. Building the package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.build">17.4. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.build.cpp">17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">17.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-defines">16.4.1. CPP defines</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list-examples">16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list">16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">17.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">17.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">16.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.install">17.6. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">16.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">16.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">16.5.3. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">16.5.7. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">16.5.8. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">16.5.15. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">17.6.1. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">17.6.5. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">17.6.6. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">17.6.13. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">16.6. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">17.7. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#debug">17. Debugging</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#submit">18. Submitting and Committing</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#debug">18. Debugging</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#submit">19. Submitting and Committing</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">18.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">18.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">19.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">19.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#devfaq">19. Frequently Asked Questions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#devfaq">20. Frequently Asked Questions</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
+</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="components"></a>Chapter 8. Package components - files, directories and contents</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="creating"></a>Chapter 8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch</h2></div></div></div>
+<p>When you find a package that is not yet in pkgsrc, you
+ most likely have a URL from where you can download the source
+ code. Starting with this URL, creating a package involves only a
+ few steps.</p>
+<div class="procedure"><ol type="1">
+<li><p>First, install the packages <a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc/pkgtools/url2pkg/README.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">pkgtools/url2pkg</code></a> and <a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc/pkgtools/pkglint/README.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">pkgtools/pkglint</code></a>.</p></li>
+<li><p>Then, choose one of the top-level directories as the
+ category in which you want to place your package. You can also
+ create a directory of your own (maybe called
+ <code class="filename">local</code>). In that category directory, create
+ another directory for your package and change into
+ it.</p></li>
+<li><p>Run the program <span><strong class="command">url2pkg</strong></span>, which
+ will ask you for a URL. Enter the URL of the distribution file
+ (in most cases a <code class="filename">.tar.gz</code> file) and watch
+ how the basic ingredients of your package are created
+ automatically. The distribution file is extracted automatically
+ to fill in some details in the <code class="filename">Makefile</code>
+ that would otherwise have to be done manually.</p></li>
+<li>
+<p>Examine the extracted files to determine the
+ dependencies of your package. Ideally, this is mentioned in some
+ <code class="filename">README</code> file, but things may differ. For
+ each of these dependencies, look where it exists in pkgsrc, and
+ if there is a file called <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> in
+ that directory, add a line to your package
+ <code class="filename">Makefile</code> which includes that file just
+ before the last line. If the <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code>
+ file does not exist, add a <code class="varname">DEPENDS</code> line to
+ the Makefile, which specifies the version of the dependency and
+ where it can be found in pkgsrc. This line should be placed in
+ the third paragraph. If the dependency is only needed for
+ building the package, but not when using it, use
+ <code class="varname">BUILD_DEPENDS</code> instead of
+ <code class="varname">DEPENDS</code>. Your package may then look like
+ this:</p>
+<pre class="programlisting">
+ [...]
+
+ BUILD_DEPENDS+= lua&gt;=5.0:../../lang/lua
+ DEPENDS+= screen-[0-9]*:../../misc/screen
+ DEPENDS+= screen&gt;=4.0:../../misc/screen
+
+ [...]
+
+ .include "../../<em class="replaceable"><code>category</code></em>/<em class="replaceable"><code>package</code></em>/buildlink3.mk"
+ .include "../../devel/glib2/buildlink3.mk"
+ .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
+</pre>
+</li>
+<li><p>Run <span><strong class="command">pkglint</strong></span> to see what things
+ still need to be done to make your package a &#8220;<span class="quote">good</span>&#8221;
+ one. If you don't know what pkglint's warnings want to tell you,
+ try <span><strong class="command">pkglint --explain</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">pkglint
+ -e</strong></span>, which outputs additional
+ explanations.</p></li>
+<li><p>Now, run <span><strong class="command">bmake</strong></span> to build the
+ package. For the various things that can go wrong in this phase,
+ consult <a href="#fixes" title="Chapter 17. Making your package work">Chapter 17, <i>Making your package work</i></a>.</p></li>
+<li><p>When the package builds fine, the next step is to
+ install the package. Run <span><strong class="command">bmake install</strong></span> and
+ hope that everything works.</p></li>
+<li><p>Up to now, the file <code class="filename">PLIST</code>,
+ which contains a list of the files that are installed by the
+ package, is nearly empty. Run <span><strong class="command">bmake print-PLIST
+ &gt;PLIST</strong></span> to generate a probably correct list. Check
+ the file using your preferred text editor to see if the list of
+ files looks plausible.</p></li>
+<li><p>Run <span><strong class="command">pkglint</strong></span> again to see if the
+ generated <code class="filename">PLIST</code> contains garbage or
+ not.</p></li>
+<li><p>When you ran <span><strong class="command">bmake install</strong></span>, the
+ package has been registered in the database of installed files,
+ but with an empty list of files. To fix this, run <span><strong class="command">bmake
+ deinstall</strong></span> and <span><strong class="command">bmake install</strong></span> again.
+ Now the package is registered with the list of files from
+ <code class="filename">PLIST</code>.</p></li>
+<li><p>Run <span><strong class="command">bmake package</strong></span> to create a
+ binary package from the set of installed files.</p></li>
+</ol></div>
+</div>
+<div class="chapter" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
+<a name="components"></a>Chapter 9. Package components - files, directories and contents</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">8.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">8.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">8.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">8.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">8.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">8.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">8.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.Makefile">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.distinfo">9.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.patches">9.3. patches/*</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#other-mandatory-files">9.4. Other mandatory files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#components.optional">9.5. Optional files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#work-dir">9.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-dir">9.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<p> Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of
@@ -3099,7 +3189,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
sections. </p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="components.Makefile"></a>8.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="components.Makefile"></a>9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all
controlled by the package's <code class="filename">Makefile</code>.
The <code class="filename">Makefile</code> describes various things about
@@ -3287,12 +3377,12 @@ a security check before building any package. See
<li><p>Replace <code class="filename">/usr/local</code> with
&#8220;<span class="quote">${PREFIX}</span>&#8221; in all files (see patches, below).</p></li>
<li><p>If the package installs any info files, see
- <a href="#faq.info-files" title="16.5.7. Packages installing info files">Section 16.5.7, &#8220;Packages installing info files&#8221;</a>.</p></li>
+ <a href="#faq.info-files" title="17.6.5. Packages installing info files">Section 17.6.5, &#8220;Packages installing info files&#8221;</a>.</p></li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="components.distinfo"></a>8.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="components.distinfo"></a>9.2. <code class="filename">distinfo</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>The <code class="filename">distinfo</code> file contains the message
digest, or checksum, of each distfile needed for the package. This
ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the Internet have not been
@@ -3302,7 +3392,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
message digests, as well as the file size.</p>
<p>The <code class="filename">distinfo</code> file also contains the
checksums for all the patches found in the
- <code class="filename">patches</code> directory (see <a href="#components.patches" title="8.3. patches/*">Section 8.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a>).</p>
+ <code class="filename">patches</code> directory (see <a href="#components.patches" title="9.3. patches/*">Section 9.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a>).</p>
<p>To regenerate the <code class="filename">distinfo</code> file, use the
<span><strong class="command">make makedistinfo</strong></span> or <span><strong class="command">make mdi</strong></span>
command.</p>
@@ -3314,7 +3404,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="components.patches"></a>8.3. patches/*</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="components.patches"></a>9.3. patches/*</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This directory contains files that are used by the
<a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?patch+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">patch</span>(1)</span></a> command to
modify the sources as distributed in the distribution file into a form
@@ -3347,7 +3437,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
previously existing one with <span><strong class="command">patchdiff</strong></span>.</p>
<p>When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums
for the patch files by using the <span><strong class="command">make makepatchsum</strong></span>
- command, see <a href="#components.distinfo" title="8.2. distinfo">Section 8.2, &#8220;<code class="filename">distinfo</code>&#8221;</a>.</p>
+ command, see <a href="#components.distinfo" title="9.2. distinfo">Section 9.2, &#8220;<code class="filename">distinfo</code>&#8221;</a>.</p>
<p>When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather
than e.g. enforcing pkgsrc's view of where man pages should go), send
the patch as a bug report to the maintainer. This benefits
@@ -3371,7 +3461,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="other-mandatory-files"></a>8.4. Other mandatory files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="other-mandatory-files"></a>9.4. Other mandatory files</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">DESCR</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>A multi-line description of the piece of software. This should include
@@ -3384,12 +3474,12 @@ a security check before building any package. See
binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of
directories, and the location of inserted files.
- See <a href="#plist" title="Chapter 10. PLIST issues">Chapter 10, <i>PLIST issues</i></a> for more information. </p></dd>
+ See <a href="#plist" title="Chapter 11. PLIST issues">Chapter 11, <i>PLIST issues</i></a> for more information. </p></dd>
</dl></div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="components.optional"></a>8.5. Optional files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="components.optional"></a>9.5. Optional files</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><code class="filename">INSTALL</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>This shell script is invoked twice by <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?pkg_add+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">pkg_add</span>(1)</span></a>.
@@ -3425,7 +3515,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="work-dir"></a>8.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="work-dir"></a>9.6. <code class="filename">work*</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>When you type <span><strong class="command">make</strong></span>, the distribution files are
unpacked into the directory denoted by
<code class="varname">WRKDIR</code>. It can be removed by running
@@ -3438,7 +3528,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="files-dir"></a>8.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="files-dir"></a>9.7. <code class="filename">files/*</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior
to configuration or building, you could place these files here and use
a &#8220;<span class="quote">${CP}</span>&#8221; command in the
@@ -3450,19 +3540,19 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="makefile"></a>Chapter 9. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="makefile"></a>Chapter 10. Programming in <code class="filename">Makefile</code>s</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">9.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">9.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.variables">10.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#makefile.variables.names">10.1.1. Naming conventions</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#makefile.code">10.2. Code snippets</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">9.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">9.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#adding-to-list">10.2.1. Adding things to a list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#converting-internal-to-external">10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#passing-variable-to-shell">10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#quoting-guideline">10.2.4. Quoting guideline</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bsd-make-bug-workaround">10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
@@ -3482,7 +3572,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
with them.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="makefile.variables"></a>9.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="makefile.variables"></a>10.1. <code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables</h2></div></div></div>
<p><code class="filename">Makefile</code> variables contain strings that
can be processed using the five operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='',
``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?make+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">make</span>(1)</span></a> man
@@ -3540,7 +3630,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</ul></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="makefile.variables.names"></a>9.1.1. Naming conventions</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="makefile.variables.names"></a>10.1.1. Naming conventions</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
<li><p>All variable names starting with an underscore
are reserved for use by the pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall
@@ -3557,13 +3647,13 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="makefile.code"></a>9.2. Code snippets</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="makefile.code"></a>10.2. Code snippets</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This section presents you with some code snippets you should
use in your own code. If you don't find anything appropriate here,
you should test your code and add it here.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="adding-to-list"></a>9.2.1. Adding things to a list</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="adding-to-list"></a>10.2.1. Adding things to a list</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
STRING= foo * bar `date`
INT_LIST= # empty
@@ -3584,7 +3674,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="converting-internal-to-external"></a>9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="converting-internal-to-external"></a>10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
EXT_LIST= # empty
.for i in ${INT_LIST}
@@ -3599,7 +3689,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="passing-variable-to-shell"></a>9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="passing-variable-to-shell"></a>10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command</h3></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
STRING= foo bar &lt; &gt; * `date` $$HOME ' "
EXT_LIST= string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
@@ -3636,7 +3726,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="quoting-guideline"></a>9.2.4. Quoting guideline</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="quoting-guideline"></a>10.2.4. Quoting guideline</h3></div></div></div>
<p>There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables.
This section lists some of the commonly known ones.</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
@@ -3719,7 +3809,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="bsd-make-bug-workaround"></a>9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="bsd-make-bug-workaround"></a>10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following
assignment correctly. In case <code class="varname">_othervar_</code>
contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is included
@@ -3735,18 +3825,18 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="plist"></a>Chapter 10. PLIST issues</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="plist"></a>Chapter 11. PLIST issues</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">10.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">10.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">10.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">10.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">10.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">10.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcs-id">11.1. RCS ID</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#automatic-plist-generation">11.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#print-PLIST">11.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#plist.misc">11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#manpage-compression">11.5. Man page compression</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#using-PLIST_SRC">11.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-specific-plist">11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#faq.common-dirs">11.8. Sharing directories between packages</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<p> The <code class="filename">PLIST</code> file contains a package's
@@ -3759,7 +3849,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
below!).</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="rcs-id"></a>10.1. RCS ID</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="rcs-id"></a>11.1. RCS ID</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any
<code class="filename">PLIST</code> file you write:
@@ -3770,17 +3860,17 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="automatic-plist-generation"></a>10.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="automatic-plist-generation"></a>11.2. Semi-automatic <code class="filename">PLIST</code> generation</h2></div></div></div>
<p>You can use the <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span> command
to output a PLIST that matches any new files since the package
- was extracted. See <a href="#build.helpful-targets" title="14.16. Other helpful targets">Section 14.16, &#8220;Other helpful targets&#8221;</a> for
+ was extracted. See <a href="#build.helpful-targets" title="15.16. Other helpful targets">Section 15.16, &#8220;Other helpful targets&#8221;</a> for
more information on this target.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="print-PLIST"></a>10.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="print-PLIST"></a>11.3. Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span></h2></div></div></div>
<p> If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in
- <a href="#faq.common-dirs" title="10.8. Sharing directories between packages">Section 10.8, &#8220;Sharing directories between packages&#8221;</a>, you may have noticed that
+ <a href="#faq.common-dirs" title="11.8. Sharing directories between packages">Section 11.8, &#8220;Sharing directories between packages&#8221;</a>, you may have noticed that
<span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span> outputs a set of
<code class="varname">@comment</code>s instead of real
<code class="varname">@dirrm</code> lines. You can also do this for
@@ -3806,7 +3896,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="plist.misc"></a>10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="plist.misc"></a>11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs
when a package is installed on a system. This includes the
@@ -3852,7 +3942,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
search for <span class="emphasis"><em>PLIST_SUBST</em></span>). </p>
<p> If you want to change other variables not listed above, you
can add variables and their expansions to this variable in the
- following way, similar to <code class="varname">MESSAGE_SUBST</code> (see <a href="#components.optional" title="8.5. Optional files">Section 8.5, &#8220;Optional files&#8221;</a>): </p>
+ following way, similar to <code class="varname">MESSAGE_SUBST</code> (see <a href="#components.optional" title="9.5. Optional files">Section 9.5, &#8220;Optional files&#8221;</a>): </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
</pre>
@@ -3861,7 +3951,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="manpage-compression"></a>10.5. Man page compression</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="manpage-compression"></a>11.5. Man page compression</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Man pages should be installed in compressed form if
<code class="varname">MANZ</code> is set (in <code class="filename">bsd.own.mk</code>),
and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the
@@ -3874,7 +3964,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="using-PLIST_SRC"></a>10.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="using-PLIST_SRC"></a>11.6. Changing PLIST source with <code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>To use one or more files as source for the <code class="filename">PLIST</code> used
in generating the binary package, set the variable
<code class="varname">PLIST_SRC</code> to the names of that file(s).
@@ -3883,7 +3973,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="platform-specific-plist"></a>10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="platform-specific-plist"></a>11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on
the operating system being used. These differences can be
automatically handled by using the following files:</p>
@@ -3897,7 +3987,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="faq.common-dirs"></a>10.8. Sharing directories between packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="faq.common-dirs"></a>11.8. Sharing directories between packages</h2></div></div></div>
<p> A &#8220;<span class="quote">shared directory</span>&#8221; is a directory where
multiple (and unrelated) packages install files. These
directories are problematic because you have to add special tricks
@@ -3954,20 +4044,20 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="buildlink"></a>Chapter 11. Buildlink methodology</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="buildlink"></a>Chapter 12. Buildlink methodology</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">11.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-buildlink3">12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#creating-buildlink3.mk">12.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">11.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-bl3">12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#updating-buildlink-depends">12.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">11.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#writing-builtin.mk">12.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">11.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#anatomy-of-builtin.mk">12.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#native-or-pkgsrc-preference">12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
@@ -3995,7 +4085,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
software. </p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="converting-to-buildlink3"></a>11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="converting-to-buildlink3"></a>12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3</h2></div></div></div>
<p>The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3
framework (&#8220;<span class="quote">bl3ifying</span>&#8221;) is fairly straightforward.
The things to keep in mind are:</p>
@@ -4071,7 +4161,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="creating-buildlink3.mk"></a>11.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="creating-buildlink3.mk"></a>12.2. Writing <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</h2></div></div></div>
<p> A package's <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> file is
included by Makefiles to indicate the need to compile and link
against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
@@ -4089,7 +4179,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
<code class="prompt">%</code> createbuildlink &gt;buildlink3.mk</code></strong></pre>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="anatomy-of-bl3"></a>11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="anatomy-of-bl3"></a>12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The following real-life example
<code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> is taken
from <code class="filename">pkgsrc/graphics/tiff</code>:</p>
@@ -4239,7 +4329,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="updating-buildlink-depends"></a>11.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="updating-buildlink-depends"></a>12.2.2. Updating <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code> in <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code> files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
The situation that requires increasing the dependency listed in
<code class="varname">BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.<em class="replaceable"><code>pkg</code></em></code>
@@ -4265,7 +4355,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
dependency and not settle for an older one which will not
contain the necessary shared libraries. </p>
<p>
- See <a href="#dependencies" title="16.1.4. Handling dependencies">Section 16.1.4, &#8220;Handling dependencies&#8221;</a> for
+ See <a href="#dependencies" title="17.1.4. Handling dependencies">Section 17.1.4, &#8220;Handling dependencies&#8221;</a> for
more information about dependencies on other packages,
including the <code class="varname">BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS</code> and
<code class="varname">ABI_DEPENDS</code> definitions. </p>
@@ -4285,7 +4375,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="writing-builtin.mk"></a>11.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="writing-builtin.mk"></a>12.3. Writing <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> files</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that
coincide with headers and libraries present in the base system.
@@ -4315,7 +4405,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</ol></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="anatomy-of-builtin.mk"></a>11.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="anatomy-of-builtin.mk"></a>12.3.1. Anatomy of a <code class="filename">builtin.mk</code> file</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk
files: </p>
<pre class="programlisting">
@@ -4407,7 +4497,7 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="native-or-pkgsrc-preference"></a>11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="native-or-pkgsrc-preference"></a>12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set
a global preference for using either the built-in (native)
@@ -4442,29 +4532,29 @@ a security check before building any package. See
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="pkginstall"></a>Chapter 12. The pkginstall framework</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="pkginstall"></a>Chapter 13. The pkginstall framework</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix">13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">12.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">12.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dirs-outside-prefix">13.1.1. Directory manipulation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#files-outside-prefix">13.1.2. File manipulation</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">12.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#conf-files">13.2. Configuration files</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">12.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">12.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-sysconfdir">13.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-configure">13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-patching">13.2.3. Patching installations</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conf-files-disable">13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">12.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">12.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">12.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">12.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">12.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#rcd-scripts">13.3. System startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#rcd-scripts-disable">13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#users-and-groups">13.4. System users and groups</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#shells">13.5. System shells</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#shells-disable">13.5.1. Disabling shell registration</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fonts">13.6. Fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fonts-disable">13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
<p>This chapter describes the framework known as
@@ -4490,7 +4580,7 @@ described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
automatically generated by pkginstall.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="files-and-dirs-outside-prefix"></a>12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="files-and-dirs-outside-prefix"></a>13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix</h2></div></div></div>
<p>As you already know, the <code class="filename">PLIST</code> file holds a list
of files and directories that belong to a package. The names used in it
are relative to the installation prefix (<code class="filename">${PREFIX}</code>),
@@ -4509,7 +4599,7 @@ directories based on variables set in the package's
variables.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="dirs-outside-prefix"></a>12.1.1. Directory manipulation</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="dirs-outside-prefix"></a>13.1.1. Directory manipulation</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The following variables can be set to request the creation of
directories anywhere in the file system:</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
@@ -4536,7 +4626,7 @@ directories anywhere in the file system:</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="files-outside-prefix"></a>12.1.2. File manipulation</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="files-outside-prefix"></a>13.1.2. File manipulation</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky
because the <code class="filename">PLIST</code> forces all files to be inside it.
To overcome this problem, the only solution is to extract the file in the
@@ -4576,7 +4666,7 @@ installation prefix:</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="conf-files"></a>12.2. Configuration files</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="conf-files"></a>13.2. Configuration files</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed
in their own specific directory, <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code>, and
need special treatment during installation (most of which is automated by
@@ -4588,7 +4678,7 @@ be removed if they have local modifications. This ensures that
administrators never lose any custom changes they may have made.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="conf-files-sysconfdir"></a>12.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="conf-files-sysconfdir"></a>13.2.1. How <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> is set</h3></div></div></div>
<p>As said before, the <code class="varname">PKG_SYSCONFDIR</code> variable
specifies where configuration files shall be installed. Its contents are
set based upon the following variables:</p>
@@ -4636,11 +4726,11 @@ following:</p>
<code class="filename">${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}</code>.</p></li>
</ol></div>
<p>It is worth mentioning that <code class="filename">${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}</code> is
-automatically added to <code class="filename">OWN_DIRS</code>. See <a href="#dirs-outside-prefix" title="12.1.1. Directory manipulation">Section 12.1.1, &#8220;Directory manipulation&#8221;</a> what this means.</p>
+automatically added to <code class="filename">OWN_DIRS</code>. See <a href="#dirs-outside-prefix" title="13.1.1. Directory manipulation">Section 13.1.1, &#8220;Directory manipulation&#8221;</a> what this means.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="conf-files-configure"></a>12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="conf-files-configure"></a>13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a
known place, you need to teach each package where it shall install its
files. In some cases you will have to patch the package Makefiles to
@@ -4657,7 +4747,7 @@ unfortunately).</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="conf-files-patching"></a>12.2.3. Patching installations</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="conf-files-patching"></a>13.2.3. Patching installations</h3></div></div></div>
<p>As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files.
This means that <span class="strong"><strong>the packages themselves must not
touch the contents of <code class="filename">${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}</code>
@@ -4674,7 +4764,7 @@ examples hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies
during the package installation to update what is in
<code class="filename">${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}</code>. To achieve this, the variables
<code class="varname">CONF_FILES</code> and <code class="varname">CONF_FILES_PERMS</code> are
-used. Check out <a href="#files-outside-prefix" title="12.1.2. File manipulation">Section 12.1.2, &#8220;File manipulation&#8221;</a> for information
+used. Check out <a href="#files-outside-prefix" title="13.1.2. File manipulation">Section 13.1.2, &#8220;File manipulation&#8221;</a> for information
about their syntax and their purpose. Here is an example, taken from the
<a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc/mail/mutt/README.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">mail/mutt</code></a> package:</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
@@ -4686,7 +4776,7 @@ package and has no meaning outside it.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="conf-files-disable"></a>12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="conf-files-disable"></a>13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the
environment variable <code class="varname">PKG_CONFIG</code> prior to package
installation.</p>
@@ -4694,10 +4784,10 @@ installation.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="rcd-scripts"></a>12.3. System startup scripts</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="rcd-scripts"></a>13.3. System startup scripts</h2></div></div></div>
<p>System startup scripts are special files because they must be
installed in a place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the
-installation prefix. Therefore, the same rules described in <a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix" title="12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix">Section 12.1, &#8220;Files and directories outside the installation prefix&#8221;</a> apply, and the same solutions
+installation prefix. Therefore, the same rules described in <a href="#files-and-dirs-outside-prefix" title="13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix">Section 13.1, &#8220;Files and directories outside the installation prefix&#8221;</a> apply, and the same solutions
can be used. However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle
these files.</p>
<p>In order to provide system startup scripts, the package has
@@ -4732,7 +4822,7 @@ script in an automated fashion:</p>
</ol></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="rcd-scripts-disable"></a>12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="rcd-scripts-disable"></a>13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the
environment variable <code class="varname">PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS</code> prior to package
installation. Note that the scripts will be always copied inside the
@@ -4742,7 +4832,7 @@ matter what the value of this variable is.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="users-and-groups"></a>12.4. System users and groups</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="users-and-groups"></a>13.4. System users and groups</h2></div></div></div>
<p>If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during
installation, it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.</p>
<p>Users can be created by adding entries to the
@@ -4779,7 +4869,7 @@ are automatically hardcoded into the final installation scripts.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="shells"></a>12.5. System shells</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="shells"></a>13.5. System shells</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell
database, <code class="filename">/etc/shells</code>, to make things easier to the
administrator. This must be done from the installation scripts to keep
@@ -4794,7 +4884,7 @@ following example, taken from <a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/
</pre>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="shells-disable"></a>12.5.1. Disabling shell registration</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="shells-disable"></a>13.5.1. Disabling shell registration</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by
the administrator by setting the <code class="filename">PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS</code>
environment variable to <code class="literal">NO</code>.</p>
@@ -4802,7 +4892,7 @@ environment variable to <code class="literal">NO</code>.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="fonts"></a>12.6. Fonts</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="fonts"></a>13.6. Fonts</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Packages that install X11 fonts should update the database files
that index the fonts within each fonts directory. This can easily be
accomplished within the pkginstall framework.</p>
@@ -4820,7 +4910,7 @@ installation prefix. Consider the following example, taken from <a href="ftp://
</pre>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="fonts-disable"></a>12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="fonts-disable"></a>13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The automatic update of fonts databases can be disabled by
the administrator by setting the <code class="filename">PKG_UPDATE_FONTS_DB</code>
environment variable to <code class="literal">NO</code>.</p>
@@ -4829,13 +4919,13 @@ environment variable to <code class="literal">NO</code>.</p>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="options"></a>Chapter 13. Options handling</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="options"></a>Chapter 14. Options handling</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">13.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">13.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">13.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#global-default-options">14.1. Global default options</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#converting-to-options">14.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#option-names">14.3. Option Names</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<p>Many packages have the ability to be built to support different
@@ -4847,7 +4937,7 @@ built into a package or to allow a set of global default options
apply.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="global-default-options"></a>13.1. Global default options</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="global-default-options"></a>14.1. Global default options</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Global default options are listed in
<code class="varname">PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS</code>, which is a list of the options
that should be built into every package if that option is supported.
@@ -4855,7 +4945,7 @@ This variable should be set in <code class="filename">/etc/mk.conf</code>.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="converting-to-options"></a>13.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="converting-to-options"></a>14.2. Converting packages to use <code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code></h2></div></div></div>
<p>The following example shows how
<code class="filename">bsd.options.mk</code> should be used
by the hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package
@@ -4895,8 +4985,8 @@ main package <code class="filename">Makefile</code>.</p>
### LDAP support
###
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
- . include "../../databases/openldap/buildlink3.mk"
- CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap}
+ . include "../../databases/openldap-client/buildlink3.mk"
+ CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap-client}
.endif
###
@@ -4993,7 +5083,7 @@ whether it is listed in <code class="varname">PKG_OPTIONS</code>:</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="option-names"></a>13.3. Option Names</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="option-names"></a>14.3. Option Names</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Options that enable similar features in different packages (like
optional support for a library) should use a common name in all
packages that support it (like the name of the library). If another
@@ -5018,31 +5108,31 @@ support.</span>&#8221; The file is sorted by option names.</p>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="build"></a>Chapter 14. The build process</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build"></a>Chapter 15. The build process</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">14.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">14.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">14.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">14.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">14.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">14.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">14.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">14.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">14.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">14.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">14.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">14.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">14.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">14.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">14.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">14.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.intro">15.1. Introduction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.prefix">15.2. Program location</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.builddirs">15.3. Directories used during the build process</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.running">15.4. Running a phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.fetch">15.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.checksum">15.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.extract">15.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.patch">15.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.tools">15.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.wrapper">15.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.configure">15.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.build">15.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.test">15.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.install">15.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.package">15.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#build.helpful-targets">15.16. Other helpful targets</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.intro"></a>14.1. Introduction</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.intro"></a>15.1. Introduction</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This chapter gives a detailed description on how a package is
built. Building a package is separated into different
<span class="emphasis"><em>phases</em></span> (for example <code class="varname">fetch</code>,
@@ -5062,7 +5152,7 @@ can be put into place on the system.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.prefix"></a>14.2. Program location</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.prefix"></a>15.2. Program location</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in
the next section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are
installed, and which variables influence this.</p>
@@ -5073,7 +5163,7 @@ can be put into place on the system.</p>
for pkgs in the &#8220;<span class="quote">cross</span>&#8221; category. The value of
<code class="varname">PREFIX</code> needs to be put
into the various places in the program's source where paths to
- these files are encoded. See <a href="#components.patches" title="8.3. patches/*">Section 8.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> and <a href="#fixes.libtool" title="16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool">Section 16.3.1, &#8220;Shared libraries - libtool&#8221;</a> for more details.</p>
+ these files are encoded. See <a href="#components.patches" title="9.3. patches/*">Section 9.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> and <a href="#fixes.libtool" title="17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool">Section 17.3.1, &#8220;Shared libraries - libtool&#8221;</a> for more details.</p>
<p>When choosing which of these variables to use,
follow the following rules:</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
@@ -5151,7 +5241,7 @@ can be put into place on the system.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.builddirs"></a>14.3. Directories used during the build process</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.builddirs"></a>15.3. Directories used during the build process</h2></div></div></div>
<p>When building a package, a number of directories is used to store
source files, temporary files, pkgsrc-internal files, and so on. These
directories are explained here.</p>
@@ -5185,7 +5275,7 @@ that isn't hidden. This variable may be changed by a package
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.running"></a>14.4. Running a phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.running"></a>15.4. Running a phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>You can run a particular phase by typing <span><strong class="command">make
phase</strong></span>, where <span class="emphasis"><em>phase</em></span> is the name of the
phase. This will automatically run all phases that are required for this
@@ -5195,7 +5285,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.fetch"></a>14.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.fetch"></a>15.5. The <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This will check if the file(s) given in the variables
<code class="varname">DISTFILES</code> and <code class="varname">PATCHFILES</code> (as
defined in the package's Makefile) are present on the
@@ -5217,7 +5307,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.checksum"></a>14.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.checksum"></a>15.6. The <span class="emphasis"><em>checksum</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and
compared with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the
checksums don't match, the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same
@@ -5227,7 +5317,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.extract"></a>14.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.extract"></a>15.7. The <span class="emphasis"><em>extract</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>When the distfiles are present on the local system, they
need to be extracted, as they usually come in the form of some
compressed archive format.</p>
@@ -5265,7 +5355,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.patch"></a>14.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.patch"></a>15.8. The <span class="emphasis"><em>patch</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>After extraction, all the patches named by the
<code class="varname">PATCHFILES</code>, those present in the patches
subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH (e.g.
@@ -5275,7 +5365,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
files ending in <code class="filename">.orig</code> or
<code class="filename">.rej</code> are ignored. Any special options to <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?patch+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">patch</span>(1)</span></a>
can be handed in <code class="varname">PATCH_DIST_ARGS</code>.
- See <a href="#components.patches" title="8.3. patches/*">Section 8.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> for more details.</p>
+ See <a href="#components.patches" title="9.3. patches/*">Section 9.3, &#8220;patches/*&#8221;</a> for more details.</p>
<p>By default <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?patch+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">patch</span>(1)</span></a> is given special args to make it fail if the
patches apply with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches
so that they apply cleanly. The rationale behind this is that
@@ -5284,14 +5374,14 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.tools"></a>14.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.tools"></a>15.9. The <span class="emphasis"><em>tools</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This is covered in
-<a href="#tools" title="Chapter 15. Tools needed for building or running">Chapter 15, <i>Tools needed for building or running</i></a>.
+<a href="#tools" title="Chapter 16. Tools needed for building or running">Chapter 16, <i>Tools needed for building or running</i></a>.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.wrapper"></a>14.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.wrapper"></a>15.10. The <span class="emphasis"><em>wrapper</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This phase creates wrapper programs for the compilers and
linkers. The following variables can be used to tweak the
wrappers.</p>
@@ -5331,7 +5421,7 @@ the package will be built, but not installed.</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.configure"></a>14.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.configure"></a>15.11. The <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Most pieces of software need information on the header files,
system calls, and library routines which are available on the platform
they run on. The process of determining this information is known as
@@ -5366,7 +5456,7 @@ being run, set <code class="varname">USE_X11BASE</code> instead.)</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.build"></a>14.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.build"></a>15.12. The <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>For building a package, a rough equivalent of the following code
is executed.</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
@@ -5392,12 +5482,12 @@ of <code class="varname">MAKEFILE</code> is &#8220;<span class="quote">Makefile<
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.test"></a>14.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.test"></a>15.13. The <span class="emphasis"><em>test</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>[TODO]</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.install"></a>14.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.install"></a>15.14. The <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to
install the software in public directories, so users can access
the programs and files.</p>
@@ -5468,12 +5558,12 @@ of <code class="varname">MAKEFILE</code> is &#8220;<span class="quote">Makefile<
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.package"></a>14.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.package"></a>15.15. The <span class="emphasis"><em>package</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<p>[TODO]</p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="build.helpful-targets"></a>14.16. Other helpful targets</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="build.helpful-targets"></a>15.16. Other helpful targets</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term">pre/post-*</span></dt>
<dd><p>For any of the main targets described in the previous section, two
@@ -5674,7 +5764,7 @@ of <code class="varname">MAKEFILE</code> is &#8220;<span class="quote">Makefile<
<code class="filename">PLIST</code>, as the &#8220;<span class="quote">find
-newer</span>&#8221; command used by this target won't catch
them!</p>
-<p> See <a href="#print-PLIST" title="10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST">Section 10.3, &#8220;Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span>&#8221;</a> for more
+<p> See <a href="#print-PLIST" title="11.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST">Section 11.3, &#8220;Tweaking output of <span><strong class="command">make print-PLIST</strong></span>&#8221;</a> for more
information on this target.</p>
</dd>
<dt><span class="term">bulk-package</span></dt>
@@ -5711,13 +5801,13 @@ of <code class="varname">MAKEFILE</code> is &#8220;<span class="quote">Makefile<
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="tools"></a>Chapter 15. Tools needed for building or running</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="tools"></a>Chapter 16. Tools needed for building or running</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">15.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">15.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#pkgsrc-tools">16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-tools">16.2. Tools needed by packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#platform-tools">16.3. Tools provided by platforms</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<p>
@@ -5751,7 +5841,7 @@ The tools used by a package can be listed by running
</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="pkgsrc-tools"></a>15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="pkgsrc-tools"></a>16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
The default set of tools used by pkgsrc is defined in
<code class="filename">bsd.pkg.mk</code>. This includes standard Unix tools,
@@ -5768,7 +5858,7 @@ to define the tools needed.
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="package-tools"></a>15.2. Tools needed by packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="package-tools"></a>16.2. Tools needed by packages</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
In the following examples, the :pkgsrc means to use the pkgsrc version
and not the native version for a build dependency.
@@ -5797,7 +5887,7 @@ tool at run-time, then just use <code class="varname">DEPENDS</code> instead.
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="platform-tools"></a>15.3. Tools provided by platforms</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="platform-tools"></a>16.3. Tools provided by platforms</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
When improving or porting pkgsrc to a new platform, have a look
at (or create) the corresponding platform specific make file fragment under
@@ -5816,70 +5906,69 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="fixes"></a>Chapter 16. Making your package work</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes"></a>Chapter 17. Making your package work</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">16.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-operation">17.1. General operation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">16.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">16.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">16.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">16.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf">17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#where-to-install-documentation">17.1.2. Where to install documentation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#restricted-packages">17.1.3. Restricted packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#dependencies">17.1.4. Handling dependencies</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#conflicts">17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#not-building-packages">17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#undeletable-packages">17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#security-handling">17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#compiler-bugs">17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#bumping-pkgrevision">17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#portability-of-packages">17.1.11. Portability of packages</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#downloading-issues">16.2. Possible downloading issues</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.fetch">17.2. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#no-plain-download">17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#modified-distfiles-same-name">17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#configuration-gotchas">16.3. Configuration gotchas</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.configure">17.3. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.libtool">17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#using-libtool">17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#autoconf-automake">17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes-build">16.4. Building the package</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.build">17.4. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
+<dd><dl><dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#fixes.build.cpp">17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally</a></span></dt></dl></dd>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">17.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-defines">16.4.1. CPP defines</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list-examples">16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#cpp-list">16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">17.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">17.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#package-specific-actions">16.5. Package specific actions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#fixes.install">17.6. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#user-interaction">16.5.1. User interaction</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#handling-licenses">16.5.2. Handling licenses</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">16.5.3. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">16.5.7. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">16.5.8. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">16.5.15. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#installing-score-files">17.6.1. Installing score files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-scripts">17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#hardcoded-paths">17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#perl-modules">17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#faq.info-files">17.6.5. Packages installing info files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#manpages">17.6.6. Packages installing man pages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gconf2-data-files">17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#scrollkeeper-data-files">17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#x11-fonts">17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#gtk2-modules">17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#sgml-xml-data">17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#mime-database">17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#intltool">17.6.13. Packages using intltool</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#startup-scripts">17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#tex-packages">17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">16.6. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#feedback-to-author">17.7. Feedback to the author</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="general-operation"></a>16.1. General operation</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="general-operation"></a>17.1. General operation</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf"></a>16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="pulling-vars-from-etc-mk.conf"></a>17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf</h3></div></div></div>
<p>The problem with package-defined variables that can be
overridden via <code class="varname">MAKECONF</code> or
<code class="filename">/etc/mk.conf</code> is that <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?make+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">make</span>(1)</span></a> expands a
@@ -5919,7 +6008,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="where-to-install-documentation"></a>16.1.2. Where to install documentation</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="where-to-install-documentation"></a>17.1.2. Where to install documentation</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Documentation should be installed into
<code class="filename">${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE}</code> or
<code class="filename">${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME}</code> (the
@@ -5927,7 +6016,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="restricted-packages"></a>16.1.3. Restricted packages</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="restricted-packages"></a>17.1.3. Restricted packages</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed.
In order to satisfy these restrictions, the package system
defines five make variables that can be set to note these
@@ -5975,7 +6064,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="dependencies"></a>16.1.4. Handling dependencies</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="dependencies"></a>17.1.4. Handling dependencies</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Your package may depend on some other package being present
- and there are various ways of expressing this
dependency. pkgsrc supports the <code class="varname">BUILD_DEPENDS</code>
@@ -5983,7 +6072,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
<code class="varname">USE_TOOLS</code> definition, as well as
dependencies via <code class="filename">buildlink3.mk</code>, which is
the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which uses the
- variables named above. See <a href="#buildlink" title="Chapter 11. Buildlink methodology">Chapter 11, <i>Buildlink methodology</i></a> for more
+ variables named above. See <a href="#buildlink" title="Chapter 12. Buildlink methodology">Chapter 12, <i>Buildlink methodology</i></a> for more
information.</p>
<p>The basic difference between the two variables is as
follows: The <code class="varname">DEPENDS</code> definition registers
@@ -6084,7 +6173,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
should not be used across different systems that may have
different versions of binary packages installed.</p>
<p>For security fixes, please update the package
- vulnerabilities file. See <a href="#security-handling" title="16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems">Section 16.1.8, &#8220;Handling packages with security problems&#8221;</a> for more
+ vulnerabilities file. See <a href="#security-handling" title="17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems">Section 17.1.8, &#8220;Handling packages with security problems&#8221;</a> for more
information.</p>
</li>
<li>
@@ -6119,7 +6208,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="conflicts"></a>16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="conflicts"></a>17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Your package may conflict with other packages a user might
already have installed on his system, e.g. if your package
installs the same set of files like another package in our
@@ -6147,7 +6236,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="not-building-packages"></a>16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="not-building-packages"></a>17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built</h3></div></div></div>
<p>There are several reasons why a package might be
instructed to not build under certain circumstances. If the
package builds and runs on most platforms, the exceptions
@@ -6167,7 +6256,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="undeletable-packages"></a>16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="undeletable-packages"></a>17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed</h3></div></div></div>
<p>To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been
installed, the <code class="varname">PKG_PRESERVE</code> definition should
be set in the package Makefile. This will be carried into any
@@ -6178,7 +6267,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="security-handling"></a>16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="security-handling"></a>17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems</h3></div></div></div>
<p>When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in
<code class="filename">localsrc/security/advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities</code>,
and after committing that file, use <span><strong class="command">make upload</strong></span>
@@ -6194,7 +6283,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="compiler-bugs"></a>16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="compiler-bugs"></a>17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on
combinations of compiler version and architecture and almost
always relation to optimisation being enabled. Common symptoms
@@ -6209,7 +6298,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="bumping-pkgrevision"></a>16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="bumping-pkgrevision"></a>17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package</h3></div></div></div>
<p>When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful
to change the version number in <code class="varname">PKGNAME</code>. To
avoid conflicting with future versions by the original author, a
@@ -6232,14 +6321,14 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="portability-of-packages"></a>16.1.11. Portability of packages</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="portability-of-packages"></a>17.1.11. Portability of packages</h3></div></div></div>
<p>One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different
platforms. As a result, it is important to ensure, where possible,
that packages in pkgsrc are portable. There are some particular
details you should pay attention to while working on pkgsrc.</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
-<a name="install-scripts"></a>16.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...</h4></div></div></div>
+<a name="install-scripts"></a>17.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...</h4></div></div></div>
<p>The BSD-compatible <span><strong class="command">install</strong></span> supplied with some
operating systems will not perform more than one operation at a time.
As such, you should call &#8220;<span class="quote">${INSTALL}</span>&#8221;, etc. like this:</p>
@@ -6252,10 +6341,10 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="downloading-issues"></a>16.2. Possible downloading issues</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.fetch"></a>17.2. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>fetch</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="no-plain-download"></a>16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="no-plain-download"></a>17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set
<code class="varname">DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES</code> and a <span><strong class="command">make
fetch</strong></span> will call <code class="filename">files/getsite.sh</code>
@@ -6277,7 +6366,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="modified-distfiles-same-name"></a>16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="modified-distfiles-same-name"></a>17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Sometimes authors of a software package make some
modifications after the software was released, and they put up a
new distfile without changing the package's version number. If a
@@ -6302,10 +6391,10 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="configuration-gotchas"></a>16.3. Configuration gotchas</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.configure"></a>17.3. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>configure</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="fixes.libtool"></a>16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.libtool"></a>17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool</h3></div></div></div>
<p>pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different
object formats like a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do
shared library and dynamic loading at all. To accompany this,
@@ -6427,7 +6516,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="using-libtool"></a>16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="using-libtool"></a>17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Add <code class="varname">USE_LIBTOOL=yes</code> to the
package Makefile. This will override the package's own libtool
in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is
@@ -6467,7 +6556,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="autoconf-automake"></a>16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="autoconf-automake"></a>17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed
to regenerate the configure script and Makefile.in makefile
templates, then they should be executed in a pre-configure
@@ -6509,31 +6598,36 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="fixes-build"></a>16.4. Building the package</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.build"></a>17.4. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>build</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
+<p>The most common failures when building a package are that
+ some platforms do not provide certain header files, functions or
+ libraries, or they provide the functions in a library that the
+ original package author didn't know. To work around this, you
+ can rewrite the source code in most cases so that it does not
+ use the missing functions or provides a replacement function.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="cpp-defines"></a>16.4.1. CPP defines</h3></div></div></div>
-<p>Sometimes you need to compile different code depending on
- the target platform. The C preprocessor has a set of predefined
- macros that can be queried by using <code class="varname">#ifdef FOO</code>
- or <code class="varname">#if defined(FOO)</code>. Among these macros are
- usually ones that describe the target CPU and operating system.
- Depending of which of the macros are defined, you can write code
- that uses features unique to a specific platform. Generally you
- should rather use the GNU autotools (automake, autoconf, etc.) to
- check for specific features (like the existence of a header file,
- a function or a library), but sometimes this is not possible or
- desired.</p>
-<p>In that case you can use the predefined macros
- below to configure your code to the platform it runs on. Almost
- every operating system, hardware architecture and compiler has its
- own macro. For example, if the macros <code class="varname">__GNUC__</code>,
- <code class="varname">__i386__</code> and <code class="varname">__NetBSD__</code> are
- all defined, you know that you are using NetBSD on an i386
- compatible CPU, and your compiler is GCC.</p>
+<a name="fixes.build.cpp"></a>17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally</h3></div></div></div>
+<p>If a package already comes with a GNU configure script, the
+ preferred way to fix the build failure is to change the
+ configure script, not the code. In the other cases, you can
+ utilize the C preprocessor, which defines certain macros
+ depending on the operating system and hardware architecture it
+ compiles for. These macros can be queried using for example
+ <code class="varname">#if defined(__i386)</code>. Almost every operating
+ system, hardware architecture and compiler has its own macro.
+ For example, if the macros <code class="varname">__GNUC__</code>,
+ <code class="varname">__i386__</code> and <code class="varname">__NetBSD__</code>
+ are all defined, you know that you are using NetBSD on an i386
+ compatible CPU, and your compiler is GCC.</p>
+<p>The list of the following macros for hardware and
+ operating system depends on the compiler that is used. For
+ example, if you want to conditionally compile code on Solaris,
+ don't use <code class="varname">__sun__</code>, as the SunPro compiler
+ does not define it. Use <code class="varname">__sun</code> instead.</p>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
-<a name="fixes-build-cpp-opsys"></a>16.4.1.1. CPP defines for operating systems</h4></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.build.cpp.os"></a>17.4.1.1. C preprocessor macros to identify the operating system</h4></div></div></div>
<p>To distinguish between 4.4 BSD-derived systems and the
rest of the world, you should use the following code.</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
@@ -6544,8 +6638,8 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
/* non-BSD-specific code goes here */
#endif
</pre>
-<p>If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also use
- the following defines.</p>
+<p>If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also test
+ for the following macros.</p>
<pre class="programlisting">
FreeBSD __FreeBSD__
DragonFly __DragonFly__
@@ -6558,7 +6652,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
-<a name="fixes-build-cpp-cpu"></a>16.4.1.2. CPP defines for CPUs</h4></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.build.cpp.arch"></a>17.4.1.2. C preprocessor macros to identify the hardware architecture</h4></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
i386 i386, __i386, __i386__
MIPS __mips
@@ -6567,63 +6661,20 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect3" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h4 class="title">
-<a name="fixes-build-cpp-compiler"></a>16.4.1.3. CPP defines for compilers</h4></div></div></div>
+<a name="fixes.build.cpp.compiler"></a>17.4.1.3. C preprocessor macros to identify the compiler</h4></div></div></div>
<pre class="programlisting">
GCC __GNUC__ (major version), __GNUC_MINOR__
SunPro __SUNPRO_C (0x570 for version 5.7)
</pre>
</div>
</div>
-<div class="sect2" lang="en">
-<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="cpp-list-examples"></a>16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms</h3></div></div></div>
-<p>The list of the CPP identification macros for hardware and
- operating system may depend on the compiler that is used. The
- following list contains some examples that may help you to choose
- the right ones. For example, if you want to conditionally compile
- code on Solaris, don't use <code class="varname">__sun__</code>, as the
- SunPro compiler does not define it. Use <code class="varname">__sun</code>
- instead.</p>
-<div class="variablelist"><dl>
-<dt><span class="term">GCC 3.3.3 + SuSE Linux 9.1 + i386</span></dt>
-<dd><p>__ELF__, __gnu_linux__, __i386, __i386__,
- __linux, __linux__, __unix, __unix__, i386, linux,
- unix.</p></dd>
-<dt><span class="term">GCC 2.95 + NetBSD 1.6.2 + i386</span></dt>
-<dd><p>__ELF__, __NetBSD__, __i386, __i386__,
- i386.</p></dd>
-<dt><span class="term">GCC 3.3.3 + NetBSD 2.0 + i386</span></dt>
-<dd><p>__ELF__, __NetBSD__, __i386, __i386__,
- i386.</p></dd>
-<dt><span class="term">GCC 4 + Solaris 8 + SPARC</span></dt>
-<dd><p>__ELF__, __sparc, __sparc__, __sun, __sun__,
- __SVR4, __svr4__, __unix, __unix__, sparc, sun,
- unix.</p></dd>
-<dt><span class="term">SunPro 5.7 + Solaris 8 + SPARC</span></dt>
-<dd><p>__SVR4, __sparc, __sun, __unix, sparc, sun,
- unix.</p></dd>
-</dl></div>
-</div>
-<div class="sect2" lang="en">
-<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="cpp-list"></a>16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines</h3></div></div></div>
-<p>If your system uses the GNU C Compiler, you can get a list
- of symbols that are defined by default, e.g. to identify the
- platform, with the following command:</p>
-<pre class="programlisting">
- gcc -E -dM - &lt; /dev/null
-</pre>
-<p>On other systems you may get the list by using the system's
- syscall trace utility (ktrace, truss, strace) to have a look which
- arguments are passed to the actual compiler.</p>
-</div>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="package-specific-actions"></a>16.5. Package specific actions</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="package-specific-actions"></a>17.5. Package specific actions</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="user-interaction"></a>16.5.1. User interaction</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="user-interaction"></a>17.5.1. User interaction</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be
in a number of ways:</p>
<div class="itemizedlist"><ul type="disc">
@@ -6645,7 +6696,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="handling-licenses"></a>16.5.2. Handling licenses</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="handling-licenses"></a>17.5.2. Handling licenses</h3></div></div></div>
<p>A package may be covered by a license which the user has
or has not agreed to accept. For these cases, pkgsrc contains
a mechanism to note that a package is covered by a particular
@@ -6715,9 +6766,13 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
be inappropriate when e.g. one accepts a particular license to
indicate to pkgsrc that a fee has been paid.</p>
</div>
+</div>
+<div class="sect1" lang="en">
+<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
+<a name="fixes.install"></a>17.6. Fixing problems in the <span class="emphasis"><em>install</em></span> phase</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="installing-score-files"></a>16.5.3. Installing score files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="installing-score-files"></a>17.6.1. Installing score files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install
a score file that allows all users on the system to record their
highscores. In order for this to work, the binaries need to be
@@ -6738,7 +6793,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="perl-scripts"></a>16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="perl-scripts"></a>17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, set
<code class="varname">REPLACE_PERL</code> to ensure that the proper
@@ -6748,7 +6803,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="hardcoded-paths"></a>16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="hardcoded-paths"></a>17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to
other interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the
@@ -6771,7 +6826,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="perl-modules"></a>16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="perl-modules"></a>17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include
the Makefile fragment
<code class="filename">../../lang/perl5/module.mk</code>. It provides a
@@ -6800,7 +6855,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="faq.info-files"></a>16.5.7. Packages installing info files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="faq.info-files"></a>17.6.5. Packages installing info files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Some packages install info files or use the
&#8220;<span class="quote">makeinfo</span>&#8221; or &#8220;<span class="quote">install-info</span>&#8221;
commands. <code class="varname">INFO_FILES</code> should be defined in
@@ -6847,7 +6902,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="manpages"></a>16.5.8. Packages installing man pages</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="manpages"></a>17.6.6. Packages installing man pages</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Many packages install manual pages. The man pages
are installed under <code class="varname">${PREFIX}/${PKGMANDIR}</code>
which is <code class="filename">/usr/pkg/man</code> by default.
@@ -6883,13 +6938,13 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
a non-standard use of --mandir, you can set
<code class="varname">GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR</code> as needed.
</p>
-<p>See <a href="#manpage-compression" title="10.5. Man page compression">Section 10.5, &#8220;Man page compression&#8221;</a> for
+<p>See <a href="#manpage-compression" title="11.5. Man page compression">Section 11.5, &#8220;Man page compression&#8221;</a> for
information on installation of compressed manual pages.
</p>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="gconf2-data-files"></a>16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="gconf2-data-files"></a>17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
If a package installs <code class="filename">.schemas</code> or
<code class="filename">.entries</code> files, used by GConf2,
@@ -6925,7 +6980,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="scrollkeeper-data-files"></a>16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="scrollkeeper-data-files"></a>17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files</h3></div></div></div>
<p>
If a package installs <code class="filename">.omf</code> files, used by
scrollkeeper, you need to take some extra steps to make sure they
@@ -6948,7 +7003,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="x11-fonts"></a>16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="x11-fonts"></a>17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild
the fonts database in the directory where they get installed at
installation and deinstallation time. This can be automatically
@@ -6965,7 +7020,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="gtk2-modules"></a>16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="gtk2-modules"></a>17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package installs GTK2 immodules or loaders, you need to
take some extra steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database
properly:</p>
@@ -7002,7 +7057,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="sgml-xml-data"></a>16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="sgml-xml-data"></a>17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be
registered in system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs,
etc.), you need to take some extra steps:
@@ -7032,7 +7087,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="mime-database"></a>16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="mime-database"></a>17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by
installing <code class="filename">.xml</code> files inside
<code class="filename">${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages</code>, you
@@ -7063,7 +7118,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="intltool"></a>16.5.15. Packages using intltool</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="intltool"></a>17.6.13. Packages using intltool</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package uses intltool during its build, include the
<code class="filename">../../textproc/intltool/buildlink3.mk</code> file,
which forces it to use the intltool package provided by pkgsrc,
@@ -7076,7 +7131,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="startup-scripts"></a>16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="startup-scripts"></a>17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into
the startup directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding
the option <code class="varname">PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES</code> in
@@ -7087,7 +7142,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="tex-packages"></a>16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="tex-packages"></a>17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules</h3></div></div></div>
<p>If a package installs TeX packages into the texmf tree,
the <code class="filename">ls-R</code> database of the tree needs to be
updated.</p>
@@ -7126,7 +7181,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="feedback-to-author"></a>16.6. Feedback to the author</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="feedback-to-author"></a>17.7. Feedback to the author</h2></div></div></div>
<p>If you have found any bugs in the package you make available,
if you had to do special steps to make it run under NetBSD or
if you enhanced the software in various other ways, be sure
@@ -7139,7 +7194,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="debug"></a>Chapter 17. Debugging</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="debug"></a>Chapter 18. Debugging</h2></div></div></div>
<p>To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps
that I do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically
the same as what was explained in the previous sections, only with some
@@ -7179,7 +7234,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
package. </p>
</li>
<li><p>Look at the <code class="filename">Makefile</code>, fix if necessary;
- see <a href="#components.Makefile" title="8.1. Makefile">Section 8.1, &#8220;<code class="filename">Makefile</code>&#8221;</a>.</p></li>
+ see <a href="#components.Makefile" title="9.1. Makefile">Section 9.1, &#8220;<code class="filename">Makefile</code>&#8221;</a>.</p></li>
<li>
<p>Generate a <code class="filename">PLIST</code>:</p>
<pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">#</code> <strong class="userinput"><code>make install</code></strong>
@@ -7220,26 +7275,26 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
<pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">#</code> <strong class="userinput"><code>pkglint</code></strong></pre>
</li>
<li><p>Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access);
- see <a href="#submit" title="Chapter 18. Submitting and Committing">Chapter 18, <i>Submitting and Committing</i></a>.</p></li>
+ see <a href="#submit" title="Chapter 19. Submitting and Committing">Chapter 19, <i>Submitting and Committing</i></a>.</p></li>
</ul></div>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="submit"></a>Chapter 18. Submitting and Committing</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="submit"></a>Chapter 19. Submitting and Committing</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">18.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">18.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-binary-packages">19.1. Submitting binary packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#submitting-your-package">19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#general-notes-for-changes">19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#committing-importing">19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#updating-package">19.5. Updating a package to a newer version</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#moving-package">19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="submitting-binary-packages"></a>18.1. Submitting binary packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="submitting-binary-packages"></a>19.1. Submitting binary packages</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc
developers to guarantee that the packages don't contain any
trojan horses etc. This is not to annoy anyone but rather to
@@ -7250,9 +7305,9 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="submitting-your-package"></a>18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="submitting-your-package"></a>19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)</h2></div></div></div>
<p>First, check that your package is complete, compiles and
- runs well; see <a href="#debug" title="Chapter 17. Debugging">Chapter 17, <i>Debugging</i></a> and the rest of this
+ runs well; see <a href="#debug" title="Chapter 18. Debugging">Chapter 18, <i>Debugging</i></a> and the rest of this
document. Next, generate an uuencoded gzipped <a href="http://netbsd.gw.com/cgi-bin/man-cgi?tar+1+NetBSD-current"><span class="citerefentry"><span class="refentrytitle">tar</span>(1)</span></a>
archive, preferably with all files in a single directory.
Finally, <span><strong class="command">send-pr</strong></span> with category
@@ -7270,7 +7325,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="general-notes-for-changes"></a>18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="general-notes-for-changes"></a>19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and
removals in <code class="filename">pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES</code>. It's very
important to keep this file up to date and conforming to the
@@ -7303,7 +7358,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="committing-importing"></a>18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="committing-importing"></a>19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write
access to the pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs
@@ -7337,7 +7392,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="updating-package"></a>18.5. Updating a package to a newer version</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="updating-package"></a>19.5. Updating a package to a newer version</h2></div></div></div>
<p>
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the
changes between old and new versions into the commit log when updating
@@ -7371,7 +7426,7 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="moving-package"></a>18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="moving-package"></a>19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="orderedlist"><ol type="1">
<li><p>Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.</p></li>
<li>
@@ -7413,7 +7468,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="devfaq"></a>Chapter 19. Frequently Asked Questions</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="devfaq"></a>Chapter 20. Frequently Asked Questions</h2></div></div></div>
<p>This section contains the answers to questions that may
arise when you are writing a package. If you don't find your
question answered here, first have a look in the other chapters,
@@ -7421,24 +7476,24 @@ place.</p></li>
<code class="literal">pkgsrc-users</code> mailing list.</p>
<div class="qandaset">
<dl>
-<dt>19.1. <a href="#id2654892">What is the difference between
+<dt>20.1. <a href="#id2655161">What is the difference between
MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and
MAKE_FLAGS?</a>
</dt>
-<dt>19.2. <a href="#id2654929">What is the difference between
+<dt>20.2. <a href="#id2655197">What is the difference between
MAKE, GMAKE and
MAKE_PROGRAM?</a>
</dt>
-<dt>19.3. <a href="#id2655035">What is the difference between
+<dt>20.3. <a href="#id2655236">What is the difference between
CC, PKG_CC and
PKGSRC_COMPILER?</a>
</dt>
-<dt>19.4. <a href="#id2655073">What is the difference between
+<dt>20.4. <a href="#id2655273">What is the difference between
BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS,
BUILDLINK_LDADD and
BUILDLINK_LIBS?</a>
</dt>
-<dt>19.5. <a href="#id2655091">Why does make show-var
+<dt>20.5. <a href="#id2655291">Why does make show-var
VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo
say it's empty?</a>
</dt>
@@ -7448,7 +7503,7 @@ place.</p></li>
<tbody>
<tr class="question">
<td align="left" valign="top">
-<a name="id2654892"></a><a name="id2654893"></a><b>19.1.</b>
+<a name="id2655161"></a><a name="id2655162"></a><b>20.1.</b>
</td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p>What is the difference between
<code class="varname">MAKEFLAGS</code>, <code class="varname">.MAKEFLAGS</code> and
@@ -7464,7 +7519,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</tr>
<tr class="question">
<td align="left" valign="top">
-<a name="id2654929"></a><a name="id2654930"></a><b>19.2.</b>
+<a name="id2655197"></a><a name="id2655198"></a><b>20.2.</b>
</td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p>What is the difference between
<code class="varname">MAKE</code>, <code class="varname">GMAKE</code> and
@@ -7482,7 +7537,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</tr>
<tr class="question">
<td align="left" valign="top">
-<a name="id2655035"></a><a name="id2655036"></a><b>19.3.</b>
+<a name="id2655236"></a><a name="id2655237"></a><b>20.3.</b>
</td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p>What is the difference between
<code class="varname">CC</code>, <code class="varname">PKG_CC</code> and
@@ -7500,7 +7555,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</tr>
<tr class="question">
<td align="left" valign="top">
-<a name="id2655073"></a><a name="id2655074"></a><b>19.4.</b>
+<a name="id2655273"></a><a name="id2655274"></a><b>20.4.</b>
</td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p>What is the difference between
<code class="varname">BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS</code>,
@@ -7513,7 +7568,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</tr>
<tr class="question">
<td align="left" valign="top">
-<a name="id2655091"></a><a name="id2655092"></a><b>19.5.</b>
+<a name="id2655291"></a><a name="id2655292"></a><b>20.5.</b>
</td>
<td align="left" valign="top"><p>Why does <span><strong class="command">make show-var
VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.<em class="replaceable"><code>foo</code></em></strong></span>
@@ -7544,52 +7599,52 @@ place.</p></li>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#infr.design">20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#infr.design">21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">20.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">21.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">20.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">20.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">21.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">21.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">20.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">21.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#regression">21. Regression tests</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#regression">22. Regression tests</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">21.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">21.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">21.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">22.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">22.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">22.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">21.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">21.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">22.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">22.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#porting">22. Porting pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="chapter"><a href="#porting">23. Porting pkgsrc</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">22.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">23.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="infr.design"></a>Chapter 20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.design"></a>Chapter 21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">20.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.var">21.1. Variable evaluation</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">20.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">20.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.load">21.1.1. At load time</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.var.run">21.1.2. At runtime</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#infr.design.intf">21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">20.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.proc">21.2.1. Procedures with parameters</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#infr.design.intf.action">21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
@@ -7599,10 +7654,10 @@ place.</p></li>
like.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="infr.var"></a>20.1. Variable evaluation</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.var"></a>21.1. Variable evaluation</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="infr.var.load"></a>20.1.1. At load time</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.var.load"></a>21.1.1. At load time</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Variable evaluation takes place either at load time or at
runtime, depending on the context in which they occur. The
contexts where variables are evaluated at load time are:</p>
@@ -7644,7 +7699,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="infr.var.run"></a>20.1.2. At runtime</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.var.run"></a>21.1.2. At runtime</h3></div></div></div>
<p>After all the files have been loaded, the values of the
variables cannot be changed anymore. Variables that are used in
the shell commands are expanded at this point.</p>
@@ -7652,14 +7707,14 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="infr.design.intf"></a>20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.design.intf"></a>21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Most of the <code class="filename">.mk</code> files fall into one
of the following classes. Cases where a file falls into more
than one class should be avoided as it often leads to subtle
bugs.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="infr.design.intf.proc"></a>20.2.1. Procedures with parameters</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.design.intf.proc"></a>21.2.1. Procedures with parameters</h3></div></div></div>
<p>In a traditional imperative programming language some of
the <code class="filename">.mk</code> files could be described as
procedures. They take some input parameters and&#8212;after
@@ -7693,7 +7748,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="infr.design.intf.action"></a>20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="infr.design.intf.action"></a>21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters</h3></div></div></div>
<p>Action files take some input parameters and may define
runtime variables. They shall not define loadtime variables.
There are action files that are included implicitly by the
@@ -7706,16 +7761,16 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="regression"></a>Chapter 21. Regression tests</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression"></a>Chapter 22. Regression tests</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">21.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">21.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">21.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.descr">22.1. The regression tests framework</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.run">22.2. Running the regression tests</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#regression.new">22.3. Adding a new regression test</a></span></dt>
<dd><dl>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">21.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">21.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.override">22.3.1. Overridable functions</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect2"><a href="#regression.fun.helper">22.3.2. Helper functions</a></span></dt>
</dl></dd>
</dl>
</div>
@@ -7729,12 +7784,12 @@ place.</p></li>
how you can add new tests.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="regression.descr"></a>21.1. The regression tests framework</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression.descr"></a>22.1. The regression tests framework</h2></div></div></div>
<p></p>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="regression.run"></a>21.2. Running the regression tests</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression.run"></a>22.2. Running the regression tests</h2></div></div></div>
<p>You first need to install the <a href="ftp://ftp.NetBSD.org/pub/NetBSD/packages/pkgsrc/pkgtools/pkg_regress/README.html" target="_top"><code class="filename">pkgtools/pkg_regress</code></a> package, which
provides the <span><strong class="command">pkg_regress</strong></span> command. Then you
can simply run that command, which will run all tests in the
@@ -7742,7 +7797,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="regression.new"></a>21.3. Adding a new regression test</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression.new"></a>22.3. Adding a new regression test</h2></div></div></div>
<p>Every directory in the <code class="filename">regress</code>
category that contains a file called <code class="filename">spec</code>
is considered a regression test. This file is a shell program
@@ -7751,7 +7806,7 @@ place.</p></li>
needs.</p>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="regression.fun.override"></a>21.3.1. Overridable functions</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression.fun.override"></a>22.3.1. Overridable functions</h3></div></div></div>
<p>These functions do not take any parameters. They are all
called in &#8220;<span class="quote">set -e</span>&#8221; mode, so you should be careful
to check the exitcodes of any commands you run in the
@@ -7778,7 +7833,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect2" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h3 class="title">
-<a name="regression.fun.helper"></a>21.3.2. Helper functions</h3></div></div></div>
+<a name="regression.fun.helper"></a>22.3.2. Helper functions</h3></div></div></div>
<div class="variablelist"><dl>
<dt><span class="term"><code class="varname">exit_status(expected)</code></span></dt>
<dd><p>This function compares the exitcode of the
@@ -7801,12 +7856,12 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="chapter" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title">
-<a name="porting"></a>Chapter 22. Porting pkgsrc</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="porting"></a>Chapter 23. Porting pkgsrc</h2></div></div></div>
<div class="toc">
<p><b>Table of Contents</b></p>
<dl>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
-<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">22.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.opsys">23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</a></span></dt>
+<dt><span class="sect1"><a href="#porting.compiler">23.2. Adding support for a new compiler</a></span></dt>
</dl>
</div>
<p>The pkgsrc system has already been ported to many
@@ -7815,7 +7870,7 @@ place.</p></li>
portable.</p>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="porting.opsys"></a>22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="porting.opsys"></a>23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system</h2></div></div></div>
<p>To port pkgsrc to a new operating system (called
<code class="literal">MyOS</code> in this example), you need to touch the
following files:</p>
@@ -7866,7 +7921,7 @@ place.</p></li>
</div>
<div class="sect1" lang="en">
<div class="titlepage"><div><div><h2 class="title" style="clear: both">
-<a name="porting.compiler"></a>22.2. Adding support for a new compiler</h2></div></div></div>
+<a name="porting.compiler"></a>23.2. Adding support for a new compiler</h2></div></div></div>
<p>TODO</p>
</div>
</div>
@@ -7962,7 +8017,7 @@ looks fine.</pre>
<code class="prompt">#</code> <strong class="userinput"><code>cd bison</code></strong>
<code class="prompt">#</code> <strong class="userinput"><code>mkdir patches</code></strong></pre>
<p>Create <code class="filename">Makefile</code>, <code class="filename">DESCR</code> and
- <code class="filename">PLIST</code> (see <a href="#components" title="Chapter 8. Package components - files, directories and contents">Chapter 8, <i>Package components - files, directories and contents</i></a>)
+ <code class="filename">PLIST</code> (see <a href="#components" title="Chapter 9. Package components - files, directories and contents">Chapter 9, <i>Package components - files, directories and contents</i></a>)
then continue with fetching the distfile:</p>
<pre class="screen"><code class="prompt">#</code> <strong class="userinput"><code>make fetch</code></strong>
&gt;&gt; bison-1.25.tar.gz doesn't seem to exist on this system.
diff --git a/doc/pkgsrc.txt b/doc/pkgsrc.txt
index cac722d9389..07ede42f035 100644
--- a/doc/pkgsrc.txt
+++ b/doc/pkgsrc.txt
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ The pkgsrc Developers
Copyright 1994-2006 The NetBSD Foundation, Inc
-$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.18 2006/05/19 22:05:09 rillig Exp $
+$NetBSD: pkgsrc.xml,v 1.19 2006/06/01 08:39:03 rillig Exp $
Abstract
@@ -128,208 +128,210 @@ I. The pkgsrc user's guide
II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
- 8. Package components - files, directories and contents
+ 8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
+ 9. Package components - files, directories and contents
- 8.1. Makefile
- 8.2. distinfo
- 8.3. patches/*
- 8.4. Other mandatory files
- 8.5. Optional files
- 8.6. work*
- 8.7. files/*
+ 9.1. Makefile
+ 9.2. distinfo
+ 9.3. patches/*
+ 9.4. Other mandatory files
+ 9.5. Optional files
+ 9.6. work*
+ 9.7. files/*
- 9. Programming in Makefiles
+ 10. Programming in Makefiles
- 9.1. Makefile variables
+ 10.1. Makefile variables
- 9.1.1. Naming conventions
+ 10.1.1. Naming conventions
- 9.2. Code snippets
+ 10.2. Code snippets
- 9.2.1. Adding things to a list
- 9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
- 9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
- 9.2.4. Quoting guideline
- 9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
+ 10.2.1. Adding things to a list
+ 10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
+ 10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
+ 10.2.4. Quoting guideline
+ 10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
- 10. PLIST issues
+ 11. PLIST issues
- 10.1. RCS ID
- 10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
- 10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
- 10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
- 10.5. Man page compression
- 10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
- 10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
- 10.8. Sharing directories between packages
+ 11.1. RCS ID
+ 11.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
+ 11.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
+ 11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
+ 11.5. Man page compression
+ 11.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
+ 11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
+ 11.8. Sharing directories between packages
- 11. Buildlink methodology
+ 12. Buildlink methodology
- 11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
- 11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
+ 12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
+ 12.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
- 11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
- 11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
+ 12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
+ 12.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
- 11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
+ 12.3. Writing builtin.mk files
- 11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
- 11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
+ 12.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
+ 12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
- 12. The pkginstall framework
+ 13. The pkginstall framework
- 12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
+ 13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
- 12.1.1. Directory manipulation
- 12.1.2. File manipulation
+ 13.1.1. Directory manipulation
+ 13.1.2. File manipulation
- 12.2. Configuration files
+ 13.2. Configuration files
- 12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
- 12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
- 12.2.3. Patching installations
- 12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
+ 13.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
+ 13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
+ 13.2.3. Patching installations
+ 13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
- 12.3. System startup scripts
+ 13.3. System startup scripts
- 12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
+ 13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
- 12.4. System users and groups
- 12.5. System shells
+ 13.4. System users and groups
+ 13.5. System shells
- 12.5.1. Disabling shell registration
+ 13.5.1. Disabling shell registration
- 12.6. Fonts
+ 13.6. Fonts
- 12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
+ 13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
- 13. Options handling
+ 14. Options handling
- 13.1. Global default options
- 13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
- 13.3. Option Names
+ 14.1. Global default options
+ 14.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
+ 14.3. Option Names
- 14. The build process
+ 15. The build process
- 14.1. Introduction
- 14.2. Program location
- 14.3. Directories used during the build process
- 14.4. Running a phase
- 14.5. The fetch phase
- 14.6. The checksum phase
- 14.7. The extract phase
- 14.8. The patch phase
- 14.9. The tools phase
- 14.10. The wrapper phase
- 14.11. The configure phase
- 14.12. The build phase
- 14.13. The test phase
- 14.14. The install phase
- 14.15. The package phase
- 14.16. Other helpful targets
+ 15.1. Introduction
+ 15.2. Program location
+ 15.3. Directories used during the build process
+ 15.4. Running a phase
+ 15.5. The fetch phase
+ 15.6. The checksum phase
+ 15.7. The extract phase
+ 15.8. The patch phase
+ 15.9. The tools phase
+ 15.10. The wrapper phase
+ 15.11. The configure phase
+ 15.12. The build phase
+ 15.13. The test phase
+ 15.14. The install phase
+ 15.15. The package phase
+ 15.16. Other helpful targets
- 15. Tools needed for building or running
+ 16. Tools needed for building or running
- 15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
- 15.2. Tools needed by packages
- 15.3. Tools provided by platforms
+ 16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
+ 16.2. Tools needed by packages
+ 16.3. Tools provided by platforms
- 16. Making your package work
+ 17. Making your package work
- 16.1. General operation
+ 17.1. General operation
- 16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
- 16.1.2. Where to install documentation
- 16.1.3. Restricted packages
- 16.1.4. Handling dependencies
- 16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
- 16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
- 16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
- 16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
- 16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
- 16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
+ 17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
+ 17.1.2. Where to install documentation
+ 17.1.3. Restricted packages
+ 17.1.4. Handling dependencies
+ 17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
+ 17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
+ 17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
+ 17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
+ 17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
+ 17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an
existing package
- 16.1.11. Portability of packages
+ 17.1.11. Portability of packages
- 16.2. Possible downloading issues
+ 17.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
- 16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
+ 17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain
downloading
- 16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
-
- 16.3. Configuration gotchas
-
- 16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
- 16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
- 16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
-
- 16.4. Building the package
-
- 16.4.1. CPP defines
- 16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms
- 16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines
-
- 16.5. Package specific actions
-
- 16.5.1. User interaction
- 16.5.2. Handling licenses
- 16.5.3. Installing score files
- 16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
- 16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
- 16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
- 16.5.7. Packages installing info files
- 16.5.8. Packages installing man pages
- 16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files
- 16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
- 16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
- 16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
- 16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
- 16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
- 16.5.15. Packages using intltool
- 16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts
- 16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules
-
- 16.6. Feedback to the author
-
- 17. Debugging
- 18. Submitting and Committing
-
- 18.1. Submitting binary packages
- 18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
- 18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
- 18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
- 18.5. Updating a package to a newer version
- 18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
-
- 19. Frequently Asked Questions
+ 17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
+
+ 17.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
+
+ 17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
+ 17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
+ 17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
+
+ 17.4. Fixing problems in the build phase
+
+ 17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
+
+ 17.5. Package specific actions
+
+ 17.5.1. User interaction
+ 17.5.2. Handling licenses
+
+ 17.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
+
+ 17.6.1. Installing score files
+ 17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts
+ 17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
+ 17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules
+ 17.6.5. Packages installing info files
+ 17.6.6. Packages installing man pages
+ 17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files
+ 17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
+ 17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts
+ 17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules
+ 17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data
+ 17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
+ 17.6.13. Packages using intltool
+ 17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts
+ 17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules
+
+ 17.7. Feedback to the author
+
+ 18. Debugging
+ 19. Submitting and Committing
+
+ 19.1. Submitting binary packages
+ 19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
+ 19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
+ 19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
+ 19.5. Updating a package to a newer version
+ 19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
+
+ 20. Frequently Asked Questions
III. The pkgsrc infrastructure internals
- 20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
+ 21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
- 20.1. Variable evaluation
+ 21.1. Variable evaluation
- 20.1.1. At load time
- 20.1.2. At runtime
+ 21.1.1. At load time
+ 21.1.2. At runtime
- 20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
+ 21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
- 20.2.1. Procedures with parameters
- 20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
+ 21.2.1. Procedures with parameters
+ 21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
- 21. Regression tests
+ 22. Regression tests
- 21.1. The regression tests framework
- 21.2. Running the regression tests
- 21.3. Adding a new regression test
+ 22.1. The regression tests framework
+ 22.2. Running the regression tests
+ 22.3. Adding a new regression test
- 21.3.1. Overridable functions
- 21.3.2. Helper functions
+ 22.3.1. Overridable functions
+ 22.3.2. Helper functions
- 22. Porting pkgsrc
+ 23. Porting pkgsrc
- 22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
- 22.2. Adding support for a new compiler
+ 23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
+ 23.2. Adding support for a new compiler
A. A simple example package: bison
@@ -699,8 +701,12 @@ activity, compared to downloading the tar file again.
Warning
-Updating from tar file cannot detect or preserve any changes you have done to
-your local copy of pkgsrc. Therefore updating via CVS is strongly recommended.
+When updating from a tar file, you first need to completely remove the old
+pkgsrc directory. Otherwise those files that have been removed from pkgsrc in
+the mean time will not be removed on your local disk, resulting in
+inconsistencies. When removing the old files, any changes that you have done to
+the pkgsrc files will be lost after updating. Therefore updating via CVS is
+strongly recommended.
To update pkgsrc from a tar file, download the tar file as explained above.
Then, make sure that you have not made any changes to the files in the pkgsrc
@@ -709,10 +715,7 @@ directory. Remove the pkgsrc directory and extract the new tar file. Done.
2.2.2. Via CVS
To update pkgsrc via CVS, make sure the environment variable CVS_RSH is set as
-above. Then, change to the pkgsrc directory and run cvs -q update -dP. The "-q"
-option tells cvs to only report those files that have changed. The "-d" option
-fetches new packages (which is curiously not done by default), and the "-P"
-option removes empty directories after everything has been updated.
+above. Then, change to the pkgsrc directory and run cvs -q update -dP.
2.2.2.1. Switching between different pkgsrc branches
@@ -1591,7 +1594,7 @@ XXX
tree. It is possible to have many pkgsrc tree instances.)
* LOCALPATCHES: Directory for local patches that aren't part of pkgsrc. See
- Section 8.3, "patches/*" for more information. rel and arch are replaced
+ Section 9.3, "patches/*" for more information. rel and arch are replaced
with OS release ("2.0", etc.) and architecture ("mipsel", etc.).
* PKGMAKECONF: Location of the mk.conf file used by a package's BSD-style
@@ -1725,12 +1728,12 @@ manipulate it. Binary packages are created by default in /usr/pkgsrc/packages,
in the form of a gzipped tar file. See Section B.2, "Packaging figlet" for a
continuation of the above misc/figlet example.
-See Chapter 18, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
+See Chapter 19, Submitting and Committing for information on how to submit such
a binary package.
6.2. Settings for creation of binary packages
-See Section 14.16, "Other helpful targets".
+See Section 15.16, "Other helpful targets".
6.3. Doing a bulk build of all packages
@@ -2470,198 +2473,271 @@ they have chosen.
Part II. The pkgsrc developer's guide
+This part of the book deals with creating and modifying packages. It starts
+with a "HOWTO"-like guide on creating a new package. The remaining chapters are
+more like a reference manual for pkgsrc.
+
Table of Contents
-8. Package components - files, directories and contents
+8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
+9. Package components - files, directories and contents
- 8.1. Makefile
- 8.2. distinfo
- 8.3. patches/*
- 8.4. Other mandatory files
- 8.5. Optional files
- 8.6. work*
- 8.7. files/*
+ 9.1. Makefile
+ 9.2. distinfo
+ 9.3. patches/*
+ 9.4. Other mandatory files
+ 9.5. Optional files
+ 9.6. work*
+ 9.7. files/*
-9. Programming in Makefiles
+10. Programming in Makefiles
- 9.1. Makefile variables
+ 10.1. Makefile variables
- 9.1.1. Naming conventions
+ 10.1.1. Naming conventions
- 9.2. Code snippets
+ 10.2. Code snippets
- 9.2.1. Adding things to a list
- 9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
- 9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
- 9.2.4. Quoting guideline
- 9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
+ 10.2.1. Adding things to a list
+ 10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
+ 10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
+ 10.2.4. Quoting guideline
+ 10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
-10. PLIST issues
+11. PLIST issues
- 10.1. RCS ID
- 10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
- 10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
- 10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
- 10.5. Man page compression
- 10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
- 10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
- 10.8. Sharing directories between packages
+ 11.1. RCS ID
+ 11.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
+ 11.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
+ 11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
+ 11.5. Man page compression
+ 11.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
+ 11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
+ 11.8. Sharing directories between packages
-11. Buildlink methodology
+12. Buildlink methodology
- 11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
- 11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
+ 12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
+ 12.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
- 11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
- 11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
+ 12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
+ 12.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
- 11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
+ 12.3. Writing builtin.mk files
- 11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
- 11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
+ 12.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
+ 12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
-12. The pkginstall framework
+13. The pkginstall framework
- 12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
+ 13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
- 12.1.1. Directory manipulation
- 12.1.2. File manipulation
+ 13.1.1. Directory manipulation
+ 13.1.2. File manipulation
- 12.2. Configuration files
+ 13.2. Configuration files
- 12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
- 12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
- 12.2.3. Patching installations
- 12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
+ 13.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
+ 13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
+ 13.2.3. Patching installations
+ 13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
- 12.3. System startup scripts
+ 13.3. System startup scripts
- 12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
+ 13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
- 12.4. System users and groups
- 12.5. System shells
+ 13.4. System users and groups
+ 13.5. System shells
- 12.5.1. Disabling shell registration
+ 13.5.1. Disabling shell registration
- 12.6. Fonts
+ 13.6. Fonts
- 12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
+ 13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
-13. Options handling
+14. Options handling
- 13.1. Global default options
- 13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
- 13.3. Option Names
+ 14.1. Global default options
+ 14.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
+ 14.3. Option Names
-14. The build process
+15. The build process
- 14.1. Introduction
- 14.2. Program location
- 14.3. Directories used during the build process
- 14.4. Running a phase
- 14.5. The fetch phase
- 14.6. The checksum phase
- 14.7. The extract phase
- 14.8. The patch phase
- 14.9. The tools phase
- 14.10. The wrapper phase
- 14.11. The configure phase
- 14.12. The build phase
- 14.13. The test phase
- 14.14. The install phase
- 14.15. The package phase
- 14.16. Other helpful targets
+ 15.1. Introduction
+ 15.2. Program location
+ 15.3. Directories used during the build process
+ 15.4. Running a phase
+ 15.5. The fetch phase
+ 15.6. The checksum phase
+ 15.7. The extract phase
+ 15.8. The patch phase
+ 15.9. The tools phase
+ 15.10. The wrapper phase
+ 15.11. The configure phase
+ 15.12. The build phase
+ 15.13. The test phase
+ 15.14. The install phase
+ 15.15. The package phase
+ 15.16. Other helpful targets
-15. Tools needed for building or running
+16. Tools needed for building or running
- 15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
- 15.2. Tools needed by packages
- 15.3. Tools provided by platforms
+ 16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
+ 16.2. Tools needed by packages
+ 16.3. Tools provided by platforms
-16. Making your package work
+17. Making your package work
- 16.1. General operation
+ 17.1. General operation
- 16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
- 16.1.2. Where to install documentation
- 16.1.3. Restricted packages
- 16.1.4. Handling dependencies
- 16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
- 16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
- 16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
- 16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
- 16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
- 16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
+ 17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
+ 17.1.2. Where to install documentation
+ 17.1.3. Restricted packages
+ 17.1.4. Handling dependencies
+ 17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
+ 17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
+ 17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
+ 17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
+ 17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
+ 17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
package
- 16.1.11. Portability of packages
+ 17.1.11. Portability of packages
+
+ 17.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
+
+ 17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
+ 17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
+
+ 17.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
+
+ 17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
+ 17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
+ 17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
+
+ 17.4. Fixing problems in the build phase
+
+ 17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
+
+ 17.5. Package specific actions
+
+ 17.5.1. User interaction
+ 17.5.2. Handling licenses
+
+ 17.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
+
+ 17.6.1. Installing score files
+ 17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts
+ 17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
+ 17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules
+ 17.6.5. Packages installing info files
+ 17.6.6. Packages installing man pages
+ 17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files
+ 17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
+ 17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts
+ 17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules
+ 17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data
+ 17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
+ 17.6.13. Packages using intltool
+ 17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts
+ 17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules
+
+ 17.7. Feedback to the author
+
+18. Debugging
+19. Submitting and Committing
+
+ 19.1. Submitting binary packages
+ 19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
+ 19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
+ 19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
+ 19.5. Updating a package to a newer version
+ 19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
- 16.2. Possible downloading issues
+20. Frequently Asked Questions
- 16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
- 16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
+Chapter 8. Creating a new pkgsrc package from scratch
- 16.3. Configuration gotchas
+When you find a package that is not yet in pkgsrc, you most likely have a URL
+from where you can download the source code. Starting with this URL, creating a
+package involves only a few steps.
- 16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
- 16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
- 16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
+ 1. First, install the packages pkgtools/url2pkg and pkgtools/pkglint.
- 16.4. Building the package
+ 2. Then, choose one of the top-level directories as the category in which you
+ want to place your package. You can also create a directory of your own
+ (maybe called local). In that category directory, create another directory
+ for your package and change into it.
- 16.4.1. CPP defines
- 16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms
- 16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines
+ 3. Run the program url2pkg, which will ask you for a URL. Enter the URL of the
+ distribution file (in most cases a .tar.gz file) and watch how the basic
+ ingredients of your package are created automatically. The distribution
+ file is extracted automatically to fill in some details in the Makefile
+ that would otherwise have to be done manually.
- 16.5. Package specific actions
+ 4. Examine the extracted files to determine the dependencies of your package.
+ Ideally, this is mentioned in some README file, but things may differ. For
+ each of these dependencies, look where it exists in pkgsrc, and if there is
+ a file called buildlink3.mk in that directory, add a line to your package
+ Makefile which includes that file just before the last line. If the
+ buildlink3.mk file does not exist, add a DEPENDS line to the Makefile,
+ which specifies the version of the dependency and where it can be found in
+ pkgsrc. This line should be placed in the third paragraph. If the
+ dependency is only needed for building the package, but not when using it,
+ use BUILD_DEPENDS instead of DEPENDS. Your package may then look like this:
- 16.5.1. User interaction
- 16.5.2. Handling licenses
- 16.5.3. Installing score files
- 16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
- 16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
- 16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
- 16.5.7. Packages installing info files
- 16.5.8. Packages installing man pages
- 16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files
- 16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
- 16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
- 16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
- 16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
- 16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
- 16.5.15. Packages using intltool
- 16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts
- 16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules
+ [...]
- 16.6. Feedback to the author
+ BUILD_DEPENDS+= lua>=5.0:../../lang/lua
+ DEPENDS+= screen-[0-9]*:../../misc/screen
+ DEPENDS+= screen>=4.0:../../misc/screen
-17. Debugging
-18. Submitting and Committing
+ [...]
- 18.1. Submitting binary packages
- 18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
- 18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
- 18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
- 18.5. Updating a package to a newer version
- 18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
+ .include "../../category/package/buildlink3.mk"
+ .include "../../devel/glib2/buildlink3.mk"
+ .include "../../mk/bsd.pkg.mk"
-19. Frequently Asked Questions
+ 5. Run pkglint to see what things still need to be done to make your package a
+ "good" one. If you don't know what pkglint's warnings want to tell you, try
+ pkglint --explain or pkglint -e, which outputs additional explanations.
-Chapter 8. Package components - files, directories and contents
+ 6. Now, run bmake to build the package. For the various things that can go
+ wrong in this phase, consult Chapter 17, Making your package work.
+
+ 7. When the package builds fine, the next step is to install the package. Run
+ bmake install and hope that everything works.
+
+ 8. Up to now, the file PLIST, which contains a list of the files that are
+ installed by the package, is nearly empty. Run bmake print-PLIST >PLIST to
+ generate a probably correct list. Check the file using your preferred text
+ editor to see if the list of files looks plausible.
+
+ 9. Run pkglint again to see if the generated PLIST contains garbage or not.
+
+10. When you ran bmake install, the package has been registered in the database
+ of installed files, but with an empty list of files. To fix this, run bmake
+ deinstall and bmake install again. Now the package is registered with the
+ list of files from PLIST.
+
+11. Run bmake package to create a binary package from the set of installed
+ files.
+
+Chapter 9. Package components - files, directories and contents
Table of Contents
-8.1. Makefile
-8.2. distinfo
-8.3. patches/*
-8.4. Other mandatory files
-8.5. Optional files
-8.6. work*
-8.7. files/*
+9.1. Makefile
+9.2. distinfo
+9.3. patches/*
+9.4. Other mandatory files
+9.5. Optional files
+9.6. work*
+9.7. files/*
Whenever you're preparing a package, there are a number of files involved which
are described in the following sections.
-8.1. Makefile
+9.1. Makefile
Building, installation and creation of a binary package are all controlled by
the package's Makefile. The Makefile describes various things about a package,
@@ -2810,10 +2886,10 @@ Please pay attention to the following gotchas:
* Replace /usr/local with "${PREFIX}" in all files (see patches, below).
- * If the package installs any info files, see Section 16.5.7, "Packages
+ * If the package installs any info files, see Section 17.6.5, "Packages
installing info files".
-8.2. distinfo
+9.2. distinfo
The distinfo file contains the message digest, or checksum, of each distfile
needed for the package. This ensures that the distfiles retrieved from the
@@ -2823,7 +2899,7 @@ algorithms, all distfiles are protected using both SHA1 and RMD160 message
digests, as well as the file size.
The distinfo file also contains the checksums for all the patches found in the
-patches directory (see Section 8.3, "patches/*").
+patches directory (see Section 9.3, "patches/*").
To regenerate the distinfo file, use the make makedistinfo or make mdi command.
@@ -2832,7 +2908,7 @@ example www/navigator). These are kept in the same distinfo file and care
should be taken when upgrading such a package to ensure distfile information is
not lost.
-8.3. patches/*
+9.3. patches/*
This directory contains files that are used by the patch(1) command to modify
the sources as distributed in the distribution file into a form that will
@@ -2863,7 +2939,7 @@ easily compare the new set of patches with the previously existing one with
patchdiff.
When you have finished a package, remember to generate the checksums for the
-patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 8.2, "distinfo"
+patch files by using the make makepatchsum command, see Section 9.2, "distinfo"
.
When adding a patch that corrects a problem in the distfile (rather than e.g.
@@ -2883,7 +2959,7 @@ for pkgsrc/graphics/png, keep it in $LOCALPATCHES/graphics/png/mypatch. All
files in the named directory are expected to be patch files, and they are
applied after pkgsrc patches are applied.
-8.4. Other mandatory files
+9.4. Other mandatory files
DESCR
@@ -2897,10 +2973,10 @@ PLIST
This file governs the files that are installed on your system: all the
binaries, manual pages, etc. There are other directives which may be
entered in this file, to control the creation and deletion of directories,
- and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 10, PLIST issues for more
+ and the location of inserted files. See Chapter 11, PLIST issues for more
information.
-8.5. Optional files
+9.5. Optional files
INSTALL
@@ -2930,7 +3006,7 @@ MESSAGE
replaces "${SOMEVAR}" with "somevalue" in MESSAGE.
-8.6. work*
+9.6. work*
When you type make, the distribution files are unpacked into the directory
denoted by WRKDIR. It can be removed by running make clean. Besides the
@@ -2938,7 +3014,7 @@ sources, this directory is also used to keep various timestamp files. The
directory gets removed completely on clean. The default is ${.CURDIR}/work or $
{.CURDIR}/work.${MACHINE_ARCH} if OBJMACHINE is set.
-8.7. files/*
+9.7. files/*
If you have any files that you wish to be placed in the package prior to
configuration or building, you could place these files here and use a "${CP}"
@@ -2946,21 +3022,21 @@ command in the "pre-configure" target to achieve this. Alternatively, you could
simply diff the file against /dev/null and use the patch mechanism to manage
the creation of this file.
-Chapter 9. Programming in Makefiles
+Chapter 10. Programming in Makefiles
Table of Contents
-9.1. Makefile variables
+10.1. Makefile variables
- 9.1.1. Naming conventions
+ 10.1.1. Naming conventions
-9.2. Code snippets
+10.2. Code snippets
- 9.2.1. Adding things to a list
- 9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
- 9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
- 9.2.4. Quoting guideline
- 9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
+ 10.2.1. Adding things to a list
+ 10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
+ 10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
+ 10.2.4. Quoting guideline
+ 10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
Pkgsrc consists of many Makefile fragments, each of which forms a well-defined
part of the pkgsrc system. Using the make(1) system as a programming language
@@ -2976,7 +3052,7 @@ used.
This chapter describes some patterns, that appear quite often in Makefiles,
including the pitfalls that come along with them.
-9.1. Makefile variables
+10.1. Makefile variables
Makefile variables contain strings that can be processed using the five
operators ``='', ``+='', ``?='', ``:='', and ``!='', which are described in the
@@ -3027,7 +3103,7 @@ Strings and two types of lists.
elements can contain any characters, including whitespace. That's why they
cannot be used in .for loops. Examples are DISTFILES and MASTER_SITES.
-9.1.1. Naming conventions
+10.1.1. Naming conventions
* All variable names starting with an underscore are reserved for use by the
pkgsrc infrastructure. They shall not be used by package Makefiles.
@@ -3038,13 +3114,13 @@ Strings and two types of lists.
* All list variables should have a ``plural'' name, e.g. PKG_OPTIONS or
DISTFILES.
-9.2. Code snippets
+10.2. Code snippets
This section presents you with some code snippets you should use in your own
code. If you don't find anything appropriate here, you should test your code
and add it here.
-9.2.1. Adding things to a list
+10.2.1. Adding things to a list
STRING= foo * bar `date`
INT_LIST= # empty
@@ -3062,7 +3138,7 @@ all other cases, you must not add a quoting level. You must not merge internal
and external lists, unless you are sure that all entries are correctly
interpreted in both lists.
-9.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
+10.2.2. Converting an internal list into an external list
EXT_LIST= # empty
.for i in ${INT_LIST}
@@ -3073,7 +3149,7 @@ This code converts the internal list INT_LIST into the external list EXT_LIST.
As the elements of an internal list are unquoted they must be quoted here. The
reason for appending "" is explained below.
-9.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
+10.2.3. Passing variables to a shell command
STRING= foo bar < > * `date` $$HOME ' "
EXT_LIST= string=${STRING:Q} x=second\ item
@@ -3108,7 +3184,7 @@ done when adding elements to the list.
As internal lists shall not be passed to the shell, there is no example for it.
-9.2.4. Quoting guideline
+10.2.4. Quoting guideline
There are many possible sources of wrongly quoted variables. This section lists
some of the commonly known ones.
@@ -3173,7 +3249,7 @@ some of the commonly known ones.
line the arguments of the echo(1) command from the first line. To avoid
this, write ${i:Q}"".
-9.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
+10.2.5. Workaround for a bug in BSD Make
The pkgsrc bmake program does not handle the following assignment correctly. In
case _othervar_ contains a ``-'' character, one of the closing braces is
@@ -3184,18 +3260,18 @@ included in ${VAR} after this code executes.
For a more complex code snippet and a workaround, see the package regress/
make-quoting, testcase bug1.
-Chapter 10. PLIST issues
+Chapter 11. PLIST issues
Table of Contents
-10.1. RCS ID
-10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
-10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
-10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
-10.5. Man page compression
-10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
-10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
-10.8. Sharing directories between packages
+11.1. RCS ID
+11.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
+11.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
+11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
+11.5. Man page compression
+11.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
+11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
+11.8. Sharing directories between packages
The PLIST file contains a package's "packing list", i.e. a list of files that
belong to the package (relative to the ${PREFIX} directory it's been installed
@@ -3203,21 +3279,21 @@ in) plus some additional statements - see the pkg_create(1) man page for a full
list. This chapter addresses some issues that need attention when dealing with
the PLIST file (or files, see below!).
-10.1. RCS ID
+11.1. RCS ID
Be sure to add a RCS ID line as the first thing in any PLIST file you write:
@comment $NetBSD$
-10.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
+11.2. Semi-automatic PLIST generation
You can use the make print-PLIST command to output a PLIST that matches any new
-files since the package was extracted. See Section 14.16, "Other helpful
+files since the package was extracted. See Section 15.16, "Other helpful
targets" for more information on this target.
-10.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
+11.3. Tweaking output of make print-PLIST
-If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 10.8,
+If you have used any of the *-dirs packages, as explained in Section 11.8,
"Sharing directories between packages", you may have noticed that make
print-PLIST outputs a set of @comments instead of real @dirrm lines. You can
also do this for specific directories and files, so that the results of that
@@ -3238,7 +3314,7 @@ converted to @comments:
PRINT_PLIST_AWK+= /^@dirrm share\/specific/ { print "@comment " $$0; next; }
-10.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
+11.4. Variable substitution in PLIST
A number of variables are substituted automatically in PLISTs when a package is
installed on a system. This includes the following variables:
@@ -3274,13 +3350,13 @@ bsd.pkg.mk (and search for PLIST_SUBST).
If you want to change other variables not listed above, you can add variables
and their expansions to this variable in the following way, similar to
-MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 8.5, "Optional files"):
+MESSAGE_SUBST (see Section 9.5, "Optional files"):
PLIST_SUBST+= SOMEVAR="somevalue"
This replaces all occurrences of "${SOMEVAR}" in the PLIST with "somevalue".
-10.5. Man page compression
+11.5. Man page compression
Man pages should be installed in compressed form if MANZ is set (in
bsd.own.mk), and uncompressed otherwise. To handle this in the PLIST file, the
@@ -3288,13 +3364,13 @@ suffix ".gz" is appended/removed automatically for man pages according to MANZ
and MANCOMPRESSED being set or not, see above for details. This modification of
the PLIST file is done on a copy of it, not PLIST itself.
-10.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
+11.6. Changing PLIST source with PLIST_SRC
To use one or more files as source for the PLIST used in generating the binary
package, set the variable PLIST_SRC to the names of that file(s). The files are
later concatenated using cat(1), and order of things is important.
-10.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
+11.7. Platform-specific and differing PLISTs
Some packages decide to install a different set of files based on the operating
system being used. These differences can be automatically handled by using the
@@ -3310,7 +3386,7 @@ following files:
* PLIST.common_end
-10.8. Sharing directories between packages
+11.8. Sharing directories between packages
A "shared directory" is a directory where multiple (and unrelated) packages
install files. These directories are problematic because you have to add
@@ -3357,20 +3433,20 @@ Note that even if your package is using $X11BASE, it must not depend on the
*-x11-dirs packages. Just specify the name without that part and pkgsrc (in
particular, mk/dirs.mk) will take care of it.
-Chapter 11. Buildlink methodology
+Chapter 12. Buildlink methodology
Table of Contents
-11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
-11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
+12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
+12.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
- 11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
- 11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
+ 12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
+ 12.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
-11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
+12.3. Writing builtin.mk files
- 11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
- 11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
+ 12.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
+ 12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
Buildlink is a framework in pkgsrc that controls what headers and libraries are
seen by a package's configure and build processes. This is implemented in a two
@@ -3391,7 +3467,7 @@ note that the normal system header and library paths, e.g. /usr/include, /usr/
lib, etc., are always searched -- buildlink3 is designed to insulate the
package build from non-system-supplied software.
-11.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
+12.1. Converting packages to use buildlink3
The process of converting packages to use the buildlink3 framework
("bl3ifying") is fairly straightforward. The things to keep in mind are:
@@ -3455,7 +3531,7 @@ issues:
The comments in those buildlink3.mk files provide a more complete description
of how to use them properly.
-11.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
+12.2. Writing buildlink3.mk files
A package's buildlink3.mk file is included by Makefiles to indicate the need to
compile and link against header files and libraries provided by the package. A
@@ -3470,7 +3546,7 @@ following command will generate a good starting point for buildlink3.mk files:
% cd pkgsrc/category/pkgdir
% createbuildlink >buildlink3.mk
-11.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
+12.2.1. Anatomy of a buildlink3.mk file
The following real-life example buildlink3.mk is taken from pkgsrc/graphics/
tiff:
@@ -3564,7 +3640,7 @@ dependencies. Including these buildlink3.mk files means that the headers and
libraries for these dependencies are also symlinked into ${BUILDLINK_DIR}
whenever the pkg buildlink3.mk file is included.
-11.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
+12.2.2. Updating BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg in buildlink3.mk files
The situation that requires increasing the dependency listed in
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg after a package update is when the API or interface
@@ -3583,7 +3659,7 @@ change. This is needed so that binary packages made using it will require the
correct package dependency and not settle for an older one which will not
contain the necessary shared libraries.
-See Section 16.1.4, "Handling dependencies" for more information about
+See Section 17.1.4, "Handling dependencies" for more information about
dependencies on other packages, including the BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS and
ABI_DEPENDS definitions.
@@ -3595,7 +3671,7 @@ dependencies.
Also it is not needed to set BUILDLINK_ABI_DEPENDS.pkg when it is identical to
BUILDLINK_API_DEPENDS.pkg.
-11.3. Writing builtin.mk files
+12.3. Writing builtin.mk files
Some packages in pkgsrc install headers and libraries that coincide with
headers and libraries present in the base system. Aside from a buildlink3.mk
@@ -3613,7 +3689,7 @@ The only requirements of a builtin.mk file for pkg are:
3. It should be written to allow multiple inclusion. This is very important
and takes careful attention to Makefile coding.
-11.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
+12.3.1. Anatomy of a builtin.mk file
The following is the recommended template for builtin.mk files:
@@ -3681,7 +3757,7 @@ the value of USE_BUILTIN.pkg set in the previous section. This typically
includes, e.g., adding additional dependency restrictions and listing
additional files to symlink into ${BUILDLINK_DIR} (via BUILDLINK_FILES.pkg).
-11.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
+12.3.2. Global preferences for native or pkgsrc software
When building packages, it's possible to choose whether to set a global
preference for using either the built-in (native) version or the pkgsrc version
@@ -3701,34 +3777,34 @@ all but the most basic bits on a NetBSD system, you can set:
A package must have a builtin.mk file to be listed in PREFER_NATIVE, otherwise
it is simply ignored in that list.
-Chapter 12. The pkginstall framework
+Chapter 13. The pkginstall framework
Table of Contents
-12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
+13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
- 12.1.1. Directory manipulation
- 12.1.2. File manipulation
+ 13.1.1. Directory manipulation
+ 13.1.2. File manipulation
-12.2. Configuration files
+13.2. Configuration files
- 12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
- 12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
- 12.2.3. Patching installations
- 12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
+ 13.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
+ 13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
+ 13.2.3. Patching installations
+ 13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
-12.3. System startup scripts
+13.3. System startup scripts
- 12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
+ 13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
-12.4. System users and groups
-12.5. System shells
+13.4. System users and groups
+13.5. System shells
- 12.5.1. Disabling shell registration
+ 13.5.1. Disabling shell registration
-12.6. Fonts
+13.6. Fonts
- 12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
+ 13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
This chapter describes the framework known as pkginstall, whose key features
are:
@@ -3757,7 +3833,7 @@ itself could be unavailable). Therefore, the only way to achieve any of the
items described above is by means of the installation scripts, which are
automatically generated by pkginstall.
-12.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
+13.1. Files and directories outside the installation prefix
As you already know, the PLIST file holds a list of files and directories that
belong to a package. The names used in it are relative to the installation
@@ -3773,7 +3849,7 @@ Here is where pkginstall comes into play: it provides generic scripts to
abstract the manipulation of such files and directories based on variables set
in the package's Makefile. The rest of this section describes these variables.
-12.1.1. Directory manipulation
+13.1.1. Directory manipulation
The following variables can be set to request the creation of directories
anywhere in the file system:
@@ -3795,7 +3871,7 @@ anywhere in the file system:
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
counterparts.
-12.1.2. File manipulation
+13.1.2. File manipulation
Creating non-empty files outside the installation prefix is tricky because the
PLIST forces all files to be inside it. To overcome this problem, the only
@@ -3825,7 +3901,7 @@ handle files outside the installation prefix:
The difference between the two is exactly the same as their non-PERMS
counterparts.
-12.2. Configuration files
+13.2. Configuration files
Configuration files are special in the sense that they are installed in their
own specific directory, PKG_SYSCONFDIR, and need special treatment during
@@ -3836,7 +3912,7 @@ if and only if they didn't exist before. Similarly, they will not be removed if
they have local modifications. This ensures that administrators never lose any
custom changes they may have made.
-12.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
+13.2.1. How PKG_SYSCONFDIR is set
As said before, the PKG_SYSCONFDIR variable specifies where configuration files
shall be installed. Its contents are set based upon the following variables:
@@ -3876,9 +3952,9 @@ basically the following:
3. Otherwise, it is set to ${PKG_SYSCONFBASE}.
It is worth mentioning that ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR} is automatically added to
-OWN_DIRS. See Section 12.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means.
+OWN_DIRS. See Section 13.1.1, "Directory manipulation" what this means.
-12.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
+13.2.2. Telling the software where configuration files are
Given that pkgsrc (and users!) expect configuration files to be in a known
place, you need to teach each package where it shall install its files. In some
@@ -3892,7 +3968,7 @@ Note that this specifies where the package has to look for its configuration
files, not where they will be originally installed (although the difference is
never explicit, unfortunately).
-12.2.3. Patching installations
+13.2.3. Patching installations
As said before, pkginstall automatically handles configuration files. This
means that the packages themselves must not touch the contents of $
@@ -3909,7 +3985,7 @@ Once the required configuration files are in place (i.e., under the examples
hierarchy), the pkginstall framework can use them as master copies during the
package installation to update what is in ${PKG_SYSCONFDIR}. To achieve this,
the variables CONF_FILES and CONF_FILES_PERMS are used. Check out
-Section 12.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and
+Section 13.1.2, "File manipulation" for information about their syntax and
their purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
EGDIR= ${PREFIX}/share/doc/mutt/samples
@@ -3918,16 +3994,16 @@ their purpose. Here is an example, taken from the mail/mutt package:
Note that the EGDIR variable is specific to that package and has no meaning
outside it.
-12.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
+13.2.4. Disabling handling of configuration files
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
variable PKG_CONFIG prior to package installation.
-12.3. System startup scripts
+13.3. System startup scripts
System startup scripts are special files because they must be installed in a
place known by the underlying OS, usually outside the installation prefix.
-Therefore, the same rules described in Section 12.1, "Files and directories
+Therefore, the same rules described in Section 13.1, "Files and directories
outside the installation prefix" apply, and the same solutions can be used.
However, pkginstall provides a special mechanism to handle these files.
@@ -3956,14 +4032,14 @@ automated fashion:
3. Add code to the installation scripts to copy the startup script from the
examples hierarchy into the system-wide startup scripts directory.
-12.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
+13.3.1. Disabling handling of system startup scripts
The automatic copying of config files can be toggled by setting the environment
variable PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS prior to package installation. Note that the scripts
will be always copied inside the examples hierarchy, ${PREFIX}/share/examples/
rc.d/, no matter what the value of this variable is.
-12.4. System users and groups
+13.4. System users and groups
If a package needs to create special users and/or groups during installation,
it can do so by using the pkginstall framework.
@@ -3992,7 +4068,7 @@ before which the users and groups are created. In this case, the numeric UIDs
and GIDs of the created users and groups are automatically hardcoded into the
final installation scripts.
-12.5. System shells
+13.5. System shells
Packages that install system shells should register them in the shell database,
/etc/shells, to make things easier to the administrator. This must be done from
@@ -4006,12 +4082,12 @@ shells/zsh:
PKG_SHELL= ${PREFIX}/bin/zsh
-12.5.1. Disabling shell registration
+13.5.1. Disabling shell registration
The automatic registration of shell interpreters can be disabled by the
administrator by setting the PKG_REGISTER_SHELLS environment variable to NO.
-12.6. Fonts
+13.6. Fonts
Packages that install X11 fonts should update the database files that index the
fonts within each fonts directory. This can easily be accomplished within the
@@ -4027,18 +4103,18 @@ example, taken from fonts/dbz-ttf:
FONTS_DIRS.ttf= ${PREFIX}/lib/X11/fonts/TTF
-12.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
+13.6.1. Disabling automatic update of the fonts databases
The automatic update of fonts databases can be disabled by the administrator by
setting the PKG_UPDATE_FONTS_DB environment variable to NO.
-Chapter 13. Options handling
+Chapter 14. Options handling
Table of Contents
-13.1. Global default options
-13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
-13.3. Option Names
+14.1. Global default options
+14.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
+14.3. Option Names
Many packages have the ability to be built to support different sets of
features. bsd.options.mk is a framework in pkgsrc that provides generic
@@ -4047,13 +4123,13 @@ can be built. It's possible for the user to specify exactly which sets of
options will be built into a package or to allow a set of global default
options apply.
-13.1. Global default options
+14.1. Global default options
Global default options are listed in PKG_DEFAULT_OPTIONS, which is a list of
the options that should be built into every package if that option is
supported. This variable should be set in /etc/mk.conf.
-13.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
+14.2. Converting packages to use bsd.options.mk
The following example shows how bsd.options.mk should be used by the
hypothetical ``wibble'' package, either in the package Makefile, or in a file,
@@ -4091,8 +4167,8 @@ e.g. options.mk, that is included by the main package Makefile.
### LDAP support
###
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Mldap)
- . include "../../databases/openldap/buildlink3.mk"
- CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap}
+ . include "../../databases/openldap-client/buildlink3.mk"
+ CONFIGURE_ARGS+= --enable-ldap=${BUILDLINK_PREFIX.openldap-client}
.endif
###
@@ -4171,7 +4247,7 @@ PKG_OPTIONS:
.if !empty(PKG_OPTIONS:Moption)
-13.3. Option Names
+14.3. Option Names
Options that enable similar features in different packages (like optional
support for a library) should use a common name in all packages that support it
@@ -4192,28 +4268,28 @@ description. The description should be a whole sentence (starting with an
uppercase letter and ending with a period) that describes what enabling the
option does. E. g. "Enable ispell support." The file is sorted by option names.
-Chapter 14. The build process
+Chapter 15. The build process
Table of Contents
-14.1. Introduction
-14.2. Program location
-14.3. Directories used during the build process
-14.4. Running a phase
-14.5. The fetch phase
-14.6. The checksum phase
-14.7. The extract phase
-14.8. The patch phase
-14.9. The tools phase
-14.10. The wrapper phase
-14.11. The configure phase
-14.12. The build phase
-14.13. The test phase
-14.14. The install phase
-14.15. The package phase
-14.16. Other helpful targets
-
-14.1. Introduction
+15.1. Introduction
+15.2. Program location
+15.3. Directories used during the build process
+15.4. Running a phase
+15.5. The fetch phase
+15.6. The checksum phase
+15.7. The extract phase
+15.8. The patch phase
+15.9. The tools phase
+15.10. The wrapper phase
+15.11. The configure phase
+15.12. The build phase
+15.13. The test phase
+15.14. The install phase
+15.15. The package phase
+15.16. Other helpful targets
+
+15.1. Introduction
This chapter gives a detailed description on how a package is built. Building a
package is separated into different phases (for example fetch, build, install),
@@ -4228,7 +4304,7 @@ any pkgsrc-specific patches to compile properly are applied, the software can
be configured, then built (usually by compiling), and finally the generated
binaries, etc. can be put into place on the system.
-14.2. Program location
+15.2. Program location
Before outlining the process performed by the NetBSD package system in the next
section, here's a brief discussion on where programs are installed, and which
@@ -4238,7 +4314,7 @@ The automatic variable PREFIX indicates where all files of the final program
shall be installed. It is usually set to LOCALBASE (/usr/pkg), or CROSSBASE for
pkgs in the "cross" category. The value of PREFIX needs to be put into the
various places in the program's source where paths to these files are encoded.
-See Section 8.3, "patches/*" and Section 16.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
+See Section 9.3, "patches/*" and Section 17.3.1, "Shared libraries - libtool"
for more details.
When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
@@ -4303,7 +4379,7 @@ When choosing which of these variables to use, follow the following rules:
the exception that manual pages go into ${PREFIX}/man, not ${PREFIX}/share/
man.
-14.3. Directories used during the build process
+15.3. Directories used during the build process
When building a package, a number of directories is used to store source files,
temporary files, pkgsrc-internal files, and so on. These directories are
@@ -4338,7 +4414,7 @@ WRKSRC
it's the only directory entry that isn't hidden. This variable may be
changed by a package Makefile.
-14.4. Running a phase
+15.4. Running a phase
You can run a particular phase by typing make phase, where phase is the name of
the phase. This will automatically run all phases that are required for this
@@ -4346,7 +4422,7 @@ phase. The default phase is build, that is, when you run make without
parameters in a package directory, the package will be built, but not
installed.
-14.5. The fetch phase
+15.5. The fetch phase
This will check if the file(s) given in the variables DISTFILES and PATCHFILES
(as defined in the package's Makefile) are present on the local system in /usr/
@@ -4361,7 +4437,7 @@ defined, else MASTER_SITES or PATCH_SITES, as applies, then finally the value
of MASTER_SITE_BACKUP. The order of all except the first can be optionally
sorted by the user, via setting either MASTER_SORT_AWK or MASTER_SORT_REGEX.
-14.6. The checksum phase
+15.6. The checksum phase
After the distfile(s) are fetched, their checksum is generated and compared
with the checksums stored in the distinfo file. If the checksums don't match,
@@ -4369,7 +4445,7 @@ the build is aborted. This is to ensure the same distfile is used for building,
and that the distfile wasn't changed, e.g. by some malign force, deliberately
changed distfiles on the master distribution site or network lossage.
-14.7. The extract phase
+15.7. The extract phase
When the distfiles are present on the local system, they need to be extracted,
as they usually come in the form of some compressed archive format.
@@ -4401,25 +4477,25 @@ file that is going to be extracted.
And if that still does not suffice, you can override the do-extract target in
the package Makefile.
-14.8. The patch phase
+15.8. The patch phase
After extraction, all the patches named by the PATCHFILES, those present in the
patches subdirectory of the package as well as in $LOCALPATCHES/$PKGPATH (e.g.
/usr/local/patches/graphics/png) are applied. Patchfiles ending in .Z or .gz
are uncompressed before they are applied, files ending in .orig or .rej are
ignored. Any special options to patch(1) can be handed in PATCH_DIST_ARGS. See
-Section 8.3, "patches/*" for more details.
+Section 9.3, "patches/*" for more details.
By default patch(1) is given special args to make it fail if the patches apply
with some lines of fuzz. Please fix (regen) the patches so that they apply
cleanly. The rationale behind this is that patches that don't apply cleanly may
end up being applied in the wrong place, and cause severe harm there.
-14.9. The tools phase
+15.9. The tools phase
-This is covered in Chapter 15, Tools needed for building or running.
+This is covered in Chapter 16, Tools needed for building or running.
-14.10. The wrapper phase
+15.10. The wrapper phase
This phase creates wrapper programs for the compilers and linkers. The
following variables can be used to tweak the wrappers.
@@ -4449,7 +4525,7 @@ WRAPPER_TRANSFORM_CMDS
A list of transformation commands. [TODO: investigate further]
-14.11. The configure phase
+15.11. The configure phase
Most pieces of software need information on the header files, system calls, and
library routines which are available on the platform they run on. The process
@@ -4477,7 +4553,7 @@ If the program uses an Imakefile for configuration, the appropriate steps can
be invoked by setting USE_IMAKE to "yes". (If you only want the package
installed in ${X11PREFIX} but xmkmf not being run, set USE_X11BASE instead.)
-14.12. The build phase
+15.12. The build phase
For building a package, a rough equivalent of the following code is executed.
@@ -4496,11 +4572,11 @@ The default value of MAKE_PROGRAM is "gmake" if USE_TOOLS contains "gmake",
"make" otherwise. The default value of MAKEFILE is "Makefile", and BUILD_TARGET
defaults to "all".
-14.13. The test phase
+15.13. The test phase
[TODO]
-14.14. The install phase
+15.14. The install phase
Once the build stage has completed, the final step is to install the software
in public directories, so users can access the programs and files.
@@ -4583,11 +4659,11 @@ INSTALLATION_DIRS
should only be set in Makefiles that are under control of the package's
author.
-14.15. The package phase
+15.15. The package phase
[TODO]
-14.16. Other helpful targets
+15.16. Other helpful targets
pre/post-*
@@ -4791,7 +4867,7 @@ print-PLIST
file access times, be sure to add these files manually to your PLIST, as
the "find -newer" command used by this target won't catch them!
- See Section 10.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more
+ See Section 11.3, "Tweaking output of make print-PLIST" for more
information on this target.
bulk-package
@@ -4823,13 +4899,13 @@ bulk-install
Beware that this target may deinstall all packages installed on a system!
-Chapter 15. Tools needed for building or running
+Chapter 16. Tools needed for building or running
Table of Contents
-15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
-15.2. Tools needed by packages
-15.3. Tools provided by platforms
+16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
+16.2. Tools needed by packages
+16.3. Tools provided by platforms
The USE_TOOLS definition is used both internally by pkgsrc and also for
individual packages to define what commands are needed for building a package
@@ -4850,7 +4926,7 @@ package may need GNU awk, bison (instead of yacc) or a better sed.
The tools used by a package can be listed by running make show-tools.
-15.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
+16.1. Tools for pkgsrc builds
The default set of tools used by pkgsrc is defined in bsd.pkg.mk. This includes
standard Unix tools, such as: cat, awk, chmod, test, and so on. These can be
@@ -4859,7 +4935,7 @@ seen by running: make show-var VARNAME=USE_TOOLS.
If a package needs a specific program to build then the USE_TOOLS variable can
be used to define the tools needed.
-15.2. Tools needed by packages
+16.2. Tools needed by packages
In the following examples, the :pkgsrc means to use the pkgsrc version and not
the native version for a build dependency. And the :run means that it is used
@@ -4877,7 +4953,7 @@ could be "/bin/bash" on Linux systems.
If you always need a pkgsrc version of the tool at run-time, then just use
DEPENDS instead.
-15.3. Tools provided by platforms
+16.3. Tools provided by platforms
When improving or porting pkgsrc to a new platform, have a look at (or create)
the corresponding platform specific make file fragment under pkgsrc/mk/tools/
@@ -4891,67 +4967,68 @@ TOOLS_PLATFORM.bzcat?= /usr/bin/bzip2 -cd
TOOLS_PLATFORM.true?= true # shell builtin
-Chapter 16. Making your package work
+Chapter 17. Making your package work
Table of Contents
-16.1. General operation
-
- 16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
- 16.1.2. Where to install documentation
- 16.1.3. Restricted packages
- 16.1.4. Handling dependencies
- 16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
- 16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
- 16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
- 16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
- 16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
- 16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
+17.1. General operation
+
+ 17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
+ 17.1.2. Where to install documentation
+ 17.1.3. Restricted packages
+ 17.1.4. Handling dependencies
+ 17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
+ 17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
+ 17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
+ 17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
+ 17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
+ 17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing
package
- 16.1.11. Portability of packages
+ 17.1.11. Portability of packages
+
+17.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
-16.2. Possible downloading issues
+ 17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
+ 17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
- 16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
- 16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
+17.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
-16.3. Configuration gotchas
+ 17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
+ 17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
+ 17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
- 16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
- 16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
- 16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
+17.4. Fixing problems in the build phase
-16.4. Building the package
+ 17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
- 16.4.1. CPP defines
- 16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms
- 16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines
+17.5. Package specific actions
-16.5. Package specific actions
+ 17.5.1. User interaction
+ 17.5.2. Handling licenses
- 16.5.1. User interaction
- 16.5.2. Handling licenses
- 16.5.3. Installing score files
- 16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
- 16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
- 16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
- 16.5.7. Packages installing info files
- 16.5.8. Packages installing man pages
- 16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files
- 16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
- 16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
- 16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
- 16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
- 16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
- 16.5.15. Packages using intltool
- 16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts
- 16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules
+17.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
-16.6. Feedback to the author
+ 17.6.1. Installing score files
+ 17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts
+ 17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
+ 17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules
+ 17.6.5. Packages installing info files
+ 17.6.6. Packages installing man pages
+ 17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files
+ 17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
+ 17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts
+ 17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules
+ 17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data
+ 17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
+ 17.6.13. Packages using intltool
+ 17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts
+ 17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules
-16.1. General operation
+17.7. Feedback to the author
-16.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
+17.1. General operation
+
+17.1.1. How to pull in variables from /etc/mk.conf
The problem with package-defined variables that can be overridden via MAKECONF
or /etc/mk.conf is that make(1) expands a variable as it is used, but evaluates
@@ -4979,13 +5056,13 @@ Using CFLAGS= (i.e. without the "+") may lead to problems with packages that
need to add their own flags. Also, you may want to take a look at the devel/
cpuflags package if you're interested in optimization for the current CPU.
-16.1.2. Where to install documentation
+17.1.2. Where to install documentation
Documentation should be installed into ${PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGBASE} or $
{PREFIX}/share/doc/${PKGNAME} (the latter includes the version number of the
package).
-16.1.3. Restricted packages
+17.1.3. Restricted packages
Some licenses restrict how software may be re-distributed. In order to satisfy
these restrictions, the package system defines five make variables that can be
@@ -5024,13 +5101,13 @@ Please note that the use of NO_PACKAGE, IGNORE, NO_CDROM, or other generic make
variables to denote restrictions is deprecated, because they unconditionally
prevent users from generating binary packages!
-16.1.4. Handling dependencies
+17.1.4. Handling dependencies
Your package may depend on some other package being present - and there are
various ways of expressing this dependency. pkgsrc supports the BUILD_DEPENDS
and DEPENDS definitions, the USE_TOOLS definition, as well as dependencies via
buildlink3.mk, which is the preferred way to handle dependencies, and which
-uses the variables named above. See Chapter 11, Buildlink methodology for more
+uses the variables named above. See Chapter 12, Buildlink methodology for more
information.
The basic difference between the two variables is as follows: The DEPENDS
@@ -5112,7 +5189,7 @@ version numbers recognized by pkg_info(1).
systems that may have different versions of binary packages installed.
For security fixes, please update the package vulnerabilities file. See
- Section 16.1.8, "Handling packages with security problems" for more
+ Section 17.1.8, "Handling packages with security problems" for more
information.
4. If your package needs some executable to be able to run correctly and if
@@ -5137,7 +5214,7 @@ gettext package. The latter adds a build dependency on either an installed
version of an older gettext package, or if it isn't, installs the devel/
gettext-m4 package.
-16.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
+17.1.5. Handling conflicts with other packages
Your package may conflict with other packages a user might already have
installed on his system, e.g. if your package installs the same set of files
@@ -5159,7 +5236,7 @@ Packages will automatically conflict with other packages with the name prefix
and a different version string. "Xaw3d-1.5" e.g. will automatically conflict
with the older version "Xaw3d-1.3".
-16.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
+17.1.6. Packages that cannot or should not be built
There are several reasons why a package might be instructed to not build under
certain circumstances. If the package builds and runs on most platforms, the
@@ -5173,7 +5250,7 @@ functionality already provided by the system), set PKG_SKIP_REASON to a
descriptive message. If the package should fail because some preconditions are
not met, set PKG_FAIL_REASON to a descriptive message.
-16.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
+17.1.7. Packages which should not be deleted, once installed
To ensure that a package may not be deleted, once it has been installed, the
PKG_PRESERVE definition should be set in the package Makefile. This will be
@@ -5181,7 +5258,7 @@ carried into any binary package that is made from this pkgsrc entry. A
"preserved" package will not be deleted using pkg_delete(1) unless the "-f"
option is used.
-16.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
+17.1.8. Handling packages with security problems
When a vulnerability is found, this should be noted in localsrc/security/
advisories/pkg-vulnerabilities, and after committing that file, use make upload
@@ -5197,7 +5274,7 @@ submit a pullup request!
Binary packages already on ftp.NetBSD.org will be handled semi-automatically by
a weekly cron job.
-16.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
+17.1.9. How to handle compiler bugs
Some source files trigger bugs in the compiler, based on combinations of
compiler version and architecture and almost always relation to optimisation
@@ -5208,7 +5285,7 @@ Typically, a workaround involves testing the MACHINE_ARCH and compiler version,
disabling optimisation for that file/MACHINE_ARCH/compiler combination, and
documenting it in pkgsrc/doc/HACKS. See that file for a number of examples!
-16.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
+17.1.10. How to handle incrementing versions when fixing an existing package
When making fixes to an existing package it can be useful to change the version
number in PKGNAME. To avoid conflicting with future versions by the original
@@ -5226,14 +5303,14 @@ like:
DISTNAME= foo-17.43
-16.1.11. Portability of packages
+17.1.11. Portability of packages
One appealing feature of pkgsrc is that it runs on many different platforms. As
a result, it is important to ensure, where possible, that packages in pkgsrc
are portable. There are some particular details you should pay attention to
while working on pkgsrc.
-16.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...
+17.1.11.1. ${INSTALL}, ${INSTALL_DATA_DIR}, ...
The BSD-compatible install supplied with some operating systems will not
perform more than one operation at a time. As such, you should call "${INSTALL}
@@ -5242,9 +5319,9 @@ perform more than one operation at a time. As such, you should call "${INSTALL}
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir1
${INSTALL_DATA_DIR} ${PREFIX}/dir2
-16.2. Possible downloading issues
+17.2. Fixing problems in the fetch phase
-16.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
+17.2.1. Packages whose distfiles aren't available for plain downloading
If you need to download from a dynamic URL you can set DYNAMIC_MASTER_SITES and
a make fetch will call files/getsite.sh with the name of each file to download
@@ -5260,7 +5337,7 @@ before aborting the build. Example:
FETCH_MESSAGE+= " "${DISTFILES:Q}
FETCH_MESSAGE+= "manually from "${MASTER_SITES:Q}"."
-16.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
+17.2.2. How to handle modified distfiles with the 'old' name
Sometimes authors of a software package make some modifications after the
software was released, and they put up a new distfile without changing the
@@ -5277,9 +5354,9 @@ filenames. Furthermore, a mail to the package's authors seems appropriate
telling them that changing distfiles after releases without changing the file
names is not good practice.
-16.3. Configuration gotchas
+17.3. Fixing problems in the configure phase
-16.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
+17.3.1. Shared libraries - libtool
pkgsrc supports many different machines, with different object formats like
a.out and ELF, and varying abilities to do shared library and dynamic loading
@@ -5374,7 +5451,7 @@ Here's how to use libtool in a pkg in seven simple steps:
7. In your PLIST, include only the .la file (this is a change from previous
behaviour).
-16.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
+17.3.2. Using libtool on GNU packages that already support libtool
Add USE_LIBTOOL=yes to the package Makefile. This will override the package's
own libtool in most cases. For older libtool using packages, libtool is made by
@@ -5408,7 +5485,7 @@ in some circumstances. Some of the more common errors are:
The function lt_dlinit() should be called and the macro
LTDL_SET_PRELOADED_SYMBOLS included in executables.
-16.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
+17.3.3. GNU Autoconf/Automake
If a package needs GNU autoconf or automake to be executed to regenerate the
configure script and Makefile.in makefile templates, then they should be
@@ -5446,26 +5523,32 @@ automake sequence. This is prevented by touching various files in the configure
stage. If this causes problems with your package you can set AUTOMAKE_OVERRIDE=
NO in the package Makefile.
-16.4. Building the package
+17.4. Fixing problems in the build phase
+
+The most common failures when building a package are that some platforms do not
+provide certain header files, functions or libraries, or they provide the
+functions in a library that the original package author didn't know. To work
+around this, you can rewrite the source code in most cases so that it does not
+use the missing functions or provides a replacement function.
-16.4.1. CPP defines
+17.4.1. Compiling C and C++ code conditionally
-Sometimes you need to compile different code depending on the target platform.
-The C preprocessor has a set of predefined macros that can be queried by using
-#ifdef FOO or #if defined(FOO). Among these macros are usually ones that
-describe the target CPU and operating system. Depending of which of the macros
-are defined, you can write code that uses features unique to a specific
-platform. Generally you should rather use the GNU autotools (automake,
-autoconf, etc.) to check for specific features (like the existence of a header
-file, a function or a library), but sometimes this is not possible or desired.
+If a package already comes with a GNU configure script, the preferred way to
+fix the build failure is to change the configure script, not the code. In the
+other cases, you can utilize the C preprocessor, which defines certain macros
+depending on the operating system and hardware architecture it compiles for.
+These macros can be queried using for example #if defined(__i386). Almost every
+operating system, hardware architecture and compiler has its own macro. For
+example, if the macros __GNUC__, __i386__ and __NetBSD__ are all defined, you
+know that you are using NetBSD on an i386 compatible CPU, and your compiler is
+GCC.
-In that case you can use the predefined macros below to configure your code to
-the platform it runs on. Almost every operating system, hardware architecture
-and compiler has its own macro. For example, if the macros __GNUC__, __i386__
-and __NetBSD__ are all defined, you know that you are using NetBSD on an i386
-compatible CPU, and your compiler is GCC.
+The list of the following macros for hardware and operating system depends on
+the compiler that is used. For example, if you want to conditionally compile
+code on Solaris, don't use __sun__, as the SunPro compiler does not define it.
+Use __sun instead.
-16.4.1.1. CPP defines for operating systems
+17.4.1.1. C preprocessor macros to identify the operating system
To distinguish between 4.4 BSD-derived systems and the rest of the world, you
should use the following code.
@@ -5477,7 +5560,8 @@ should use the following code.
/* non-BSD-specific code goes here */
#endif
-If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also use the following defines.
+If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also test for the following
+macros.
FreeBSD __FreeBSD__
DragonFly __DragonFly__
@@ -5487,61 +5571,20 @@ If this distinction is not fine enough, you can also use the following defines.
OpenBSD __OpenBSD__
Solaris sun, __sun
-16.4.1.2. CPP defines for CPUs
+17.4.1.2. C preprocessor macros to identify the hardware architecture
i386 i386, __i386, __i386__
MIPS __mips
SPARC sparc, __sparc
-16.4.1.3. CPP defines for compilers
+17.4.1.3. C preprocessor macros to identify the compiler
GCC __GNUC__ (major version), __GNUC_MINOR__
SunPro __SUNPRO_C (0x570 for version 5.7)
-16.4.2. Examples of CPP defines for some platforms
-
-The list of the CPP identification macros for hardware and operating system may
-depend on the compiler that is used. The following list contains some examples
-that may help you to choose the right ones. For example, if you want to
-conditionally compile code on Solaris, don't use __sun__, as the SunPro
-compiler does not define it. Use __sun instead.
-
-GCC 3.3.3 + SuSE Linux 9.1 + i386
-
- __ELF__, __gnu_linux__, __i386, __i386__, __linux, __linux__, __unix,
- __unix__, i386, linux, unix.
-
-GCC 2.95 + NetBSD 1.6.2 + i386
+17.5. Package specific actions
- __ELF__, __NetBSD__, __i386, __i386__, i386.
-
-GCC 3.3.3 + NetBSD 2.0 + i386
-
- __ELF__, __NetBSD__, __i386, __i386__, i386.
-
-GCC 4 + Solaris 8 + SPARC
-
- __ELF__, __sparc, __sparc__, __sun, __sun__, __SVR4, __svr4__, __unix,
- __unix__, sparc, sun, unix.
-
-SunPro 5.7 + Solaris 8 + SPARC
-
- __SVR4, __sparc, __sun, __unix, sparc, sun, unix.
-
-16.4.3. Getting a list of CPP defines
-
-If your system uses the GNU C Compiler, you can get a list of symbols that are
-defined by default, e.g. to identify the platform, with the following command:
-
- gcc -E -dM - < /dev/null
-
-On other systems you may get the list by using the system's syscall trace
-utility (ktrace, truss, strace) to have a look which arguments are passed to
-the actual compiler.
-
-16.5. Package specific actions
-
-16.5.1. User interaction
+17.5.1. User interaction
Occasionally, packages require interaction from the user, and this can be in a
number of ways:
@@ -5564,7 +5607,7 @@ Multiple interactive stages can be specified:
INTERACTIVE_STAGE= configure install
-16.5.2. Handling licenses
+17.5.2. Handling licenses
A package may be covered by a license which the user has or has not agreed to
accept. For these cases, pkgsrc contains a mechanism to note that a package is
@@ -5619,7 +5662,9 @@ license text for another package. In particular, this can be inappropriate when
e.g. one accepts a particular license to indicate to pkgsrc that a fee has been
paid.
-16.5.3. Installing score files
+17.6. Fixing problems in the install phase
+
+17.6.1. Installing score files
Certain packages, most of them in the games category, install a score file that
allows all users on the system to record their highscores. In order for this to
@@ -5634,13 +5679,13 @@ SETGIDGAME=YES will set all the other variables accordingly.
A package should therefor never hard code file ownership or access permissions
but rely on INSTALL_GAME and INSTALL_GAME_DATA to set these correctly.
-16.5.4. Packages containing perl scripts
+17.6.2. Packages containing perl scripts
If your package contains interpreted perl scripts, set REPLACE_PERL to ensure
that the proper interpreter path is set. REPLACE_PERL should contain a list of
scripts, relative to WRKSRC, that you want adjusted.
-16.5.5. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
+17.6.3. Packages with hardcoded paths to other interpreters
Your package may also contain scripts with hardcoded paths to other
interpreters besides (or as well as) perl. To correct the full pathname to the
@@ -5657,7 +5702,7 @@ Note
Before March 2006, these variables were called _REPLACE.* and _REPLACE_FILES.*.
-16.5.6. Packages installing perl modules
+17.6.4. Packages installing perl modules
Makefiles of packages providing perl5 modules should include the Makefile
fragment ../../lang/perl5/module.mk. It provides a do-configure target for the
@@ -5677,7 +5722,7 @@ three locations in which perl5 modules may be installed, and may be used by
perl5 packages that don't have a packlist. These three variables are also
substituted for in the PLIST.
-16.5.7. Packages installing info files
+17.6.5. Packages installing info files
Some packages install info files or use the "makeinfo" or "install-info"
commands. INFO_FILES should be defined in the package Makefile so that INSTALL
@@ -5712,7 +5757,7 @@ message. The script overriding makeinfo logs a message and according to the
value of TEXINFO_REQD either runs the appropriate makeinfo command or exit on
error.
-16.5.8. Packages installing man pages
+17.6.6. Packages installing man pages
Many packages install manual pages. The man pages are installed under ${PREFIX}
/${PKGMANDIR} which is /usr/pkg/man by default. PKGMANDIR defaults to "man".
@@ -5735,10 +5780,10 @@ Packages that use GNU_CONFIGURE but do not use --mandir, can set
CONFIGURE_HAS_MANDIR to "no". Or if the ./configure script uses a non-standard
use of --mandir, you can set GNU_CONFIGURE_MANDIR as needed.
-See Section 10.5, "Man page compression" for information on installation of
+See Section 11.5, "Man page compression" for information on installation of
compressed manual pages.
-16.5.9. Packages installing GConf2 data files
+17.6.7. Packages installing GConf2 data files
If a package installs .schemas or .entries files, used by GConf2, you need to
take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
@@ -5765,7 +5810,7 @@ take some extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
.entries files installed by the package, if any. Names must not contain any
directories in them.
-16.5.10. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
+17.6.8. Packages installing scrollkeeper data files
If a package installs .omf files, used by scrollkeeper, you need to take some
extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
@@ -5781,7 +5826,7 @@ extra steps to make sure they get registered in the database:
3. Remove the share/omf directory from the PLIST. It will be handled by
scrollkeeper.
-16.5.11. Packages installing X11 fonts
+17.6.9. Packages installing X11 fonts
If a package installs font files, you will need to rebuild the fonts database
in the directory where they get installed at installation and deinstallation
@@ -5795,7 +5840,7 @@ Note that you should not create new directories for fonts; instead use the
standard ones to avoid that the user needs to manually configure his X server
to find them.
-16.5.12. Packages installing GTK2 modules
+17.6.10. Packages installing GTK2 modules
If a package installs GTK2 immodules or loaders, you need to take some extra
steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
@@ -5818,7 +5863,7 @@ steps to get them registered in the GTK2 database properly:
5. Check the PLIST and remove any entries under the libdata/gtk-2.0 directory,
as they will be handled automatically.
-16.5.13. Packages installing SGML or XML data
+17.6.11. Packages installing SGML or XML data
If a package installs SGML or XML data files that need to be registered in
system-wide catalogs (like DTDs, sub-catalogs, etc.), you need to take some
@@ -5844,7 +5889,7 @@ extra steps:
(specifically, arguments recognized by the 'add' action). Note that you
will normally not use this variable.
-16.5.14. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
+17.6.12. Packages installing extensions to the MIME database
If a package provides extensions to the MIME database by installing .xml files
inside ${PREFIX}/share/mime/packages, you need to take some extra steps to
@@ -5865,7 +5910,7 @@ ensure that the database is kept consistent with respect to these new files:
3. Remove any share/mime/* directories from the PLIST. They will be handled by
the shared-mime-info package.
-16.5.15. Packages using intltool
+17.6.13. Packages using intltool
If a package uses intltool during its build, include the ../../textproc/
intltool/buildlink3.mk file, which forces it to use the intltool package
@@ -5875,7 +5920,7 @@ This tracks intltool's build-time dependencies and uses the latest available
version; this way, the package benefits of any bug fixes that may have appeared
since it was released.
-16.5.16. Packages installing startup scripts
+17.6.14. Packages installing startup scripts
If a package contains a rc.d script, it won't be copied into the startup
directory by default, but you can enable it, by adding the option
@@ -5883,7 +5928,7 @@ PKG_RCD_SCRIPTS=YES in /etc/mk.conf. This option will copy the scripts into /
etc/rc.d when a package is installed, and it will automatically remove the
scripts when the package is deinstalled.
-16.5.17. Packages installing TeX modules
+17.6.15. Packages installing TeX modules
If a package installs TeX packages into the texmf tree, the ls-R database of
the tree needs to be updated.
@@ -5909,7 +5954,7 @@ into PKG_LOCALTEXMFPREFIX, not PKG_TEXMFPREFIX.
3. Make sure that none of ls-R databases are included in PLIST, as they will
be removed only by the teTeX-bin package.
-16.6. Feedback to the author
+17.7. Feedback to the author
If you have found any bugs in the package you make available, if you had to do
special steps to make it run under NetBSD or if you enhanced the software in
@@ -5920,7 +5965,7 @@ win from your efforts.
Support the idea of free software!
-Chapter 17. Debugging
+Chapter 18. Debugging
To check out all the gotchas when building a package, here are the steps that I
do in order to get a package working. Please note this is basically the same as
@@ -5958,7 +6003,7 @@ what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
shouldn't be, especially during the build phase. mkpatches, patchdiff and
pkgvi are from the pkgtools/pkgdiff package.
- * Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 8.1, "Makefile".
+ * Look at the Makefile, fix if necessary; see Section 9.1, "Makefile".
* Generate a PLIST:
@@ -5999,21 +6044,21 @@ what was explained in the previous sections, only with some debugging aids.
# pkglint
- * Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 18, Submitting and
+ * Submit (or commit, if you have cvs access); see Chapter 19, Submitting and
Committing.
-Chapter 18. Submitting and Committing
+Chapter 19. Submitting and Committing
Table of Contents
-18.1. Submitting binary packages
-18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
-18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
-18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
-18.5. Updating a package to a newer version
-18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
+19.1. Submitting binary packages
+19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
+19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
+19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
+19.5. Updating a package to a newer version
+19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
-18.1. Submitting binary packages
+19.1. Submitting binary packages
Our policy is that we accept binaries only from pkgsrc developers to guarantee
that the packages don't contain any trojan horses etc. This is not to annoy
@@ -6022,10 +6067,10 @@ home-made binary packages and tell the world where to get them. NetBSD
developers doing bulk builds and wanting to upload them please see
Section 6.3.8, "Uploading results of a bulk build".
-18.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
+19.2. Submitting source packages (for non-NetBSD-developers)
First, check that your package is complete, compiles and runs well; see
-Chapter 17, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
+Chapter 18, Debugging and the rest of this document. Next, generate an
uuencoded gzipped tar(1) archive, preferably with all files in a single
directory. Finally, send-pr with category "pkg", a synopsis which includes the
package name and version number, a short description of your package (contents
@@ -6039,7 +6084,7 @@ Alternatively, you can also import new packages into pkgsrc-wip ("pkgsrc
work-in-progress"); see the homepage at http://pkgsrc-wip.sourceforge.net/ for
details.
-18.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
+19.3. General notes when adding, updating, or removing packages
Please note all package additions, updates, moves, and removals in pkgsrc/doc/
CHANGES. It's very important to keep this file up to date and conforming to the
@@ -6063,7 +6108,7 @@ or package moves or removals, set the CTYPE variable on the command line to
if your local login name is not the same as your NetBSD login name. Don't
forget to commit the changes to pkgsrc/doc/CHANGES!
-18.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
+19.4. Committing: Importing a package into CVS
This section is only of interest for pkgsrc developers with write access to the
pkgsrc repository. Please remember that cvs imports files relative to the
@@ -6085,7 +6130,7 @@ so people reading the mailing lists know what the package is/does.
For new packages, "cvs import" is preferred to "cvs add" because the former
gets everything with a single command, and provides a consistent tag.
-18.5. Updating a package to a newer version
+19.5. Updating a package to a newer version
Please always put a concise, appropriate and relevant summary of the changes
between old and new versions into the commit log when updating a package. There
@@ -6110,7 +6155,7 @@ which pkgsrc is used. Please use your judgement about what should go into
pkgsrc, and bear in mind that stability is to be preferred above new and
possibly untested features.
-18.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
+19.6. Moving a package in pkgsrc
1. Make a copy of the directory somewhere else.
@@ -6146,46 +6191,46 @@ possibly untested features.
(and any packages from step 5, of course).
-Chapter 19. Frequently Asked Questions
+Chapter 20. Frequently Asked Questions
This section contains the answers to questions that may arise when you are
writing a package. If you don't find your question answered here, first have a
look in the other chapters, and if you still don't have the answer, ask on the
pkgsrc-users mailing list.
-19.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
-19.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
-19.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
-19.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
+20.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
+20.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
+20.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
+20.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
-19.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
+20.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
-19.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
+20.1. What is the difference between MAKEFLAGS, .MAKEFLAGS and MAKE_FLAGS?
MAKEFLAGS are the flags passed to the pkgsrc-internal invocations of make
(1), while MAKE_FLAGS are the flags that are passed to the MAKE_PROGRAM
when building the package. [FIXME: What is .MAKEFLAGS for?]
-19.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
+20.2. What is the difference between MAKE, GMAKE and MAKE_PROGRAM?
MAKE is the path to the make(1) program that is used in the pkgsrc
infrastructure. GMAKE is the path to GNU Make, but you need to say
USE_TOOLS+=gmake to use that. MAKE_PROGRAM is the path to the Make
program that is used for building the package.
-19.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
+20.3. What is the difference between CC, PKG_CC and PKGSRC_COMPILER?
CC is the path to the real C compiler, which can be configured by the
pkgsrc user. PKG_CC is the path to the compiler wrapper. PKGSRC_COMPILER
is not a path to a compiler, but the type of compiler that should be
used. See mk/compiler.mk for more information about the latter variable.
-19.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
+20.4. What is the difference between BUILDLINK_LDFLAGS, BUILDLINK_LDADD and
BUILDLINK_LIBS?
[FIXME]
-19.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
+20.5. Why does make show-var VARNAME=BUILDLINK_PREFIX.foo say it's empty?
For optimization reasons, some variables are only available in the
"wrapper" phase and later. To "simulate" the wrapper phase, append
@@ -6199,53 +6244,53 @@ maintainer should not need anything from this part.
Table of Contents
-20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
+21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
- 20.1. Variable evaluation
+ 21.1. Variable evaluation
- 20.1.1. At load time
- 20.1.2. At runtime
+ 21.1.1. At load time
+ 21.1.2. At runtime
- 20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
+ 21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
- 20.2.1. Procedures with parameters
- 20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
+ 21.2.1. Procedures with parameters
+ 21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
-21. Regression tests
+22. Regression tests
- 21.1. The regression tests framework
- 21.2. Running the regression tests
- 21.3. Adding a new regression test
+ 22.1. The regression tests framework
+ 22.2. Running the regression tests
+ 22.3. Adding a new regression test
- 21.3.1. Overridable functions
- 21.3.2. Helper functions
+ 22.3.1. Overridable functions
+ 22.3.2. Helper functions
-22. Porting pkgsrc
+23. Porting pkgsrc
- 22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
- 22.2. Adding support for a new compiler
+ 23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
+ 23.2. Adding support for a new compiler
-Chapter 20. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
+Chapter 21. Design of the pkgsrc infrastructure
Table of Contents
-20.1. Variable evaluation
+21.1. Variable evaluation
- 20.1.1. At load time
- 20.1.2. At runtime
+ 21.1.1. At load time
+ 21.1.2. At runtime
-20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
+21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
- 20.2.1. Procedures with parameters
- 20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
+ 21.2.1. Procedures with parameters
+ 21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of many small Makefile fragments. Each such
fragment needs a properly specified interface. This chapter explains how such
an interface looks like.
-20.1. Variable evaluation
+21.1. Variable evaluation
-20.1.1. At load time
+21.1.1. At load time
Variable evaluation takes place either at load time or at runtime, depending on
the context in which they occur. The contexts where variables are evaluated at
@@ -6281,19 +6326,19 @@ paragraph, the -Wall is appended to the CFLAGS, but this addition will not
appear in CONFIGURE_ARGS. In actual code, the three paragraphs from above
typically occur in completely unrelated files.
-20.1.2. At runtime
+21.1.2. At runtime
After all the files have been loaded, the values of the variables cannot be
changed anymore. Variables that are used in the shell commands are expanded at
this point.
-20.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
+21.2. Designing interfaces for Makefile fragments
Most of the .mk files fall into one of the following classes. Cases where a
file falls into more than one class should be avoided as it often leads to
subtle bugs.
-20.2.1. Procedures with parameters
+21.2.1. Procedures with parameters
In a traditional imperative programming language some of the .mk files could be
described as procedures. They take some input parameters and?after inclusion?
@@ -6320,7 +6365,7 @@ Examples for procedures are mk/bsd.options.mk and mk/buildlink3/bsd.builtin.mk.
To express that the parameters are evaluated at load time, they should be
assigned using the := operator, which should be used only for this purpose.
-20.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
+21.2.2. Actions taken on behalf of parameters
Action files take some input parameters and may define runtime variables. They
shall not define loadtime variables. There are action files that are included
@@ -6329,16 +6374,16 @@ explicitly.
An example for action files is mk/subst.mk.
-Chapter 21. Regression tests
+Chapter 22. Regression tests
Table of Contents
-21.1. The regression tests framework
-21.2. Running the regression tests
-21.3. Adding a new regression test
+22.1. The regression tests framework
+22.2. Running the regression tests
+22.3. Adding a new regression test
- 21.3.1. Overridable functions
- 21.3.2. Helper functions
+ 22.3.1. Overridable functions
+ 22.3.2. Helper functions
The pkgsrc infrastructure consists of a large codebase, and there are many
corners where every little bit of a file is well thought out, making pkgsrc
@@ -6347,22 +6392,22 @@ changes from breaking anything, a suite of regression tests should go along
with every important part of the pkgsrc infrastructure. This chapter describes
how regression tests work in pkgsrc and how you can add new tests.
-21.1. The regression tests framework
+22.1. The regression tests framework
-21.2. Running the regression tests
+22.2. Running the regression tests
You first need to install the pkgtools/pkg_regress package, which provides the
pkg_regress command. Then you can simply run that command, which will run all
tests in the regress category.
-21.3. Adding a new regression test
+22.3. Adding a new regression test
Every directory in the regress category that contains a file called spec is
considered a regression test. This file is a shell program that is included by
the pkg_regress command. The following functions can be overridden to suit your
needs.
-21.3.1. Overridable functions
+22.3.1. Overridable functions
These functions do not take any parameters. They are all called in "set -e"
mode, so you should be careful to check the exitcodes of any commands you run
@@ -6390,7 +6435,7 @@ do_cleanup()
This function cleans everything up after the test has been run. By default
it does nothing.
-21.3.2. Helper functions
+22.3.2. Helper functions
exit_status(expected)
@@ -6409,18 +6454,18 @@ output_prohibit(regex...)
() does not match the extended regular expression. If any of the regular
expressions matches, the test will fail.
-Chapter 22. Porting pkgsrc
+Chapter 23. Porting pkgsrc
Table of Contents
-22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
-22.2. Adding support for a new compiler
+23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
+23.2. Adding support for a new compiler
The pkgsrc system has already been ported to many operating systems, hardware
architectures and compilers. This chapter explains the necessary steps to make
pkgsrc even more portable.
-22.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
+23.1. Porting pkgsrc to a new operating system
To port pkgsrc to a new operating system (called MyOS in this example), you
need to touch the following files:
@@ -6468,7 +6513,7 @@ mk/tools/MyOS.mk
Now, you should be able to build some basic packages, like lang/perl5, shells/
bash.
-22.2. Adding support for a new compiler
+23.2. Adding support for a new compiler
TODO
@@ -6545,7 +6590,7 @@ Create the directory where the package lives, plus any auxiliary directories:
# cd bison
# mkdir patches
-Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 8, Package components - files,
+Create Makefile, DESCR and PLIST (see Chapter 9, Package components - files,
directories and contents) then continue with fetching the distfile:
# make fetch